manualshive.com logo in svg

Cisco ONS 15454 SDH, Руководство по процедурам

Процедурный мануал для продукта Cisco ONS 15454 SDH доступен для скачивания бесплатно на manualshive.com. Руководство содержит все необходимые инструкции по установке и использованию данного устройства. Скачайте его сейчас и получите полное представление о функциональности продукта.

Поделиться
Скачать
background image

5-37

Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide, R7.0

78-17194-01

Chapter 5      Turn Up a Network

NTP- D344 Open-Ended SNCP Acceptance Test

Step 5

On the network map, double-click the node that you logged into in Step 

1

. 

Step 6

Create a test circuit from that node to the STM-N trunk (span) cards on the nodes that connect to the 
third-party network. For example, in 

Figure 5-11 on page 5-35

, a circuit is created from Node 1 to the 

Slot 5 STM-N card at Node 2, and a secondary circuit destination is created on the Slot 12 STM-N card 
at Node 3. For circuit creation procedures, complete one of the following:

  •

For VC4 circuits, complete the 

“NTP-D323 Create an Automatically Routed High-Order Circuit” 

procedure on page 6-55

. When you set the circuit state, choose 

Unlocked

 and check the 

Apply to drop ports

 check box.

  •

For VC3 circuits, complete the 

“NTP-D54 Create an Automatically Routed Low-Order VC3 

Circuit” procedure on page 6-31

. When you set the circuit state, choose 

Unlocked

 and check the 

Apply to drop ports

 check box.

  •

For VC12 circuits, complete the 

“NTP-D81 Create an Automatically Routed Low-Order VC12 

Circuit” procedure on page 6-19

. When you set the circuit state, choose 

Unlocked

 and check the 

Apply to drop ports

 check box.

  •

For VC11 circuits, complete the 

“NTP-D334 Create an Automatically Routed Low-Order VC11 

Circuit” procedure on page 6-7

. When you set the circuit state, choose 

Unlocked

 and check the 

Apply to drop ports

 check box.

Step 7

Create a circuit within the third-party network from ONS 15454 SDH connection ports to the second set 
of ONS 15454 SDH connection ports on both SNCP spans. Refer to the third-party equipment 
documentation for circuit creation procedures.

Step 8

Repeat 

Step 6

 to create a second circuit at the terminating node on the other side of the third-party 

network. In 

Figure 5-11

, this is Node 6. However, this circuit will have two sources, one at 

Node 4/Slot 12, and one at Node 5/Slot 5. The destination will be a drop card on Node 6.

Step 9

Configure the test set for the test circuit type you created: 

  •

VC4 or VC4-nc—If you are testing a VC4 circuit or a VC4-nc circuit on an STM-N card, you must 
have a direct optical interface into the ONS 15454 SDH. Set the test set for STM-N. For information 
about configuring your test set, consult your test set user guide.

  •

VC3—If you are testing a clear channel E3/DS3I, you must have a patch panel or a direct E3/DS3I 
interface into the ONS  15454  SDH. Set the test set for clear channel E3/DS3I. For information about 
configuring your test set, consult your test set user guide.

  •

VC12—If you are testing an E1, you must have a patch panel or a direct E1 interface to the 
ONS 15454 SDH. Set the test set for E1. For information about configuring your test set, consult 
your test set user guide.

  •

VC11—If you are testing a VC11 circuit on an STM-N or MRC-12 card, you must have a direct 
optical interface to the ONS 15454 SDH. Set the test set for STM-N. For information about 
configuring your test set, consult your test set user guide.

Step 10

Verify the integrity of all patch cables that will be used in this test by connecting one end to the test set 
transmit (Tx) connector and the other end to the test set receive (Rx) connector. If the test set does not 
run error-free, check the cable for damage and check the test set to make sure it is set up correctly before 
continuing.

Step 11

Create a physical loopback at the circuit destination card: 

a.

Attach one end of a patch cable to the destination port’s transmit (Tx) connector.

b.

Attach the other end to the port’s receive (Rx) connector. 

Step 12

At the circuit source card:

a.

Connect the transmit (Tx) connector of the test set to the circuit receive (Rx) connector.

Содержание ONS 15454 SDH

Страница 1: ...Inc 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose CA 95134 1706 USA http www cisco com Tel 408 526 4000 800 553 NETS 6387 Fax 408 526 4100 Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide Product and Documentation Release 7 0 August 2012 Text Part Number 78 17194 01 ...

Страница 2: ...s and you may be required to correct any interference to radio or television communications at your own expense You can determine whether your equipment is causing interference by turning it off If the interference stops it was probably caused by the Cisco equipment or one of its peripheral devices If the equipment causes interference to radio or television reception try to correct the interferenc...

Страница 3: ... C H A P T E R 1 Install the Shelf and FMECs 1 1 Before You Begin 1 1 Required Tools and Equipment 1 2 Cisco Supplied Equipment 1 2 User Supplied Equipment 1 3 Tools Needed 1 4 Test Equipment 1 4 NTP D1 Unpack and Inspect the ONS 15454 SDH Shelf Assembly 1 4 NTP D2 Install the Shelf Assembly 1 5 NTP D3 Open and Remove the Front Door 1 6 NTP D219 Open and Remove the FMEC Cover 1 7 NTP D220 Install ...

Страница 4: ...ace a Card 2 20 NTP D20 Replace the Front Door 2 21 C H A P T E R 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI 3 1 Before You Begin 3 1 NTP D278 Set Up Computer for CTC 3 2 NTP D260 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the ONS 15454 SDH 3 3 NTP D261 Set Up a Computer for a Corporate LAN Connection to the ONS 15454 SDH 3 5 NTP D262 Set Up a Remote Access Connection to the ONS 15454 SDH 3 6 NT...

Страница 5: ...tance Test 5 24 NTP D217 Provision a Traditional SNCP Dual Ring Interconnect 5 26 NTP D218 Provision an Integrated SNCP Dual Ring Interconnect 5 28 NTP D306 Provision a Traditional MS SPRing SNCP Dual Ring Interconnect 5 30 NTP D307 Provision an Integrated MS SPRing SNCP Dual Ring Interconnect 5 32 NTP D258 Provision an Open Ended SNCP 5 34 NTP D344 Open Ended SNCP Acceptance Test 5 36 NTP D46 Sub...

Страница 6: ...n MS SPRing or 1 1 Node 6 68 NTP D140 Create a Half Circuit on an SNCP Ring Node 6 70 NTP D191 Create an E Series EtherSwitch Circuit Multicard or Single Card Mode 6 72 NTP D192 Create a Circuit for an E Series Card in Port Mapped Mode 6 75 NTP D142 Create an E Series Shared Packet Ring Ethernet Circuit 6 77 NTP D143 Create an E Series Hub and Spoke Ethernet Configuration 6 80 NTP D144 Create an E...

Страница 7: ...onitor FC_MR 4 Performance 8 6 NTP D302 Create or Delete FC_MR 4 RMON Thresholds 8 6 C H A P T E R 9 Manage Alarms 9 1 Before You Begin 9 1 NTP D195 Document Existing Provisioning 9 2 NTP D196 View Alarms History Events and Conditions 9 2 NTP D68 Delete Cleared Alarms from Display 9 3 NTP D69 View Alarm Affected Circuits 9 4 NTP D70 View Alarm Counts on the LCD for a Node Slot or Port 9 5 NTP D71 ...

Страница 8: ...ify Users and Change Security 11 7 NTP D87 Change SNMP Settings 11 7 C H A P T E R 12 Upgrade Cards and Spans 12 1 Before You Begin 12 1 NTP D234 Upgrade the XC VXL 2 5G Card to the XC VXL 10G or XC VXC 10G Card 12 2 NTP D333 Upgrade the XC VXL 10G Card to the XC VXC 10G Card 12 4 NTP D314 Upgrade the TCC2 Card to the TCC2P Card 12 5 NTP D94 Upgrade STM N Cards and Spans Automatically 12 7 NTP D95...

Страница 9: ...Before You Begin 15 1 NTP D107 Inspect and Maintain the Air Filter 15 2 NTP D108 Back Up the Database 15 5 NTP D109 Restore the Database 15 6 NTP D328 View and Manage OSI Information 15 8 NTP D163 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration 15 9 NTP D312 Viewing the Audit Trail Records 15 10 NTP D214 Off Load the Audit Trail Record 15 12 NTP D313 Off Load the Diagnostics File 15 13 NTP D231 Initiate...

Страница 10: ... Office Power to the ONS 15454 SDH Shelf 17 15 DLP D18 Turn On and Verify Office Power 17 16 DLP D22 Install Fiber Optic Cables in a 1 1 Configuration 17 17 DLP D23 View Spanning Tree Information 17 19 DLP D24 Change an MS SPRing Node ID 17 19 DLP D25 Configure the CTC Alerts Dialog Box for Automatic Popup 17 20 DLP D26 Provision a VCAT Circuit Route 17 20 DLP D27 Delete Circuits 17 21 DLP D28 Cre...

Страница 11: ...Groups 17 51 DLP D62 Add a Node to the Current Session or Login Group 17 53 DLP D64 Set the IP Address Default Router and Network Mask Using the LCD 17 53 DLP D65 Create a Static Route 17 56 DLP D67 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the ONS 15454 SDH 17 57 DLP D68 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the CTC Computer 17 57 DLP D69 Set Up External or Line Timing 17 58 DLP D70 Set Up Internal Timin...

Страница 12: ...8 3 DLP D105 Configure the Node for RADIUS Authentication 18 5 DLP D106 View and Terminate Active Logins 18 7 DLP D107 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Device 18 8 DLP D108 Change Line Settings for STM N Cards 18 9 DLP D109 Change Optics Thresholds Settings for STM 64 and MRC 12 Cards 18 12 DLP D111 Changing the Maximum Number of Session Entries for Alarm History 18 14 DLP D112 Display Alarms and Condit...

Страница 13: ... 48 DLP D158 Change User Password and Security Level on a Single Node 18 49 DLP D159 Delete a User on a Single Node 18 50 DLP D160 Change User Password and Security Level on Multiple Nodes 18 50 DLP D161 Delete a User on Multiple Nodes 18 51 DLP D162 Format and Enter NMS Community String for SNMP Command or Operation 18 52 DLP D163 Delete SNMP Trap Destination 18 53 DLP D165 Provision OSI Routing ...

Страница 14: ...fy Timing in a Reduced Ring 18 82 DLP D196 Delete an MS SPRing from a Single Node 18 83 DLP D197 Initiate an SNCP Force Switch 18 84 DLP D198 Clear an SNCP Force Switch 18 85 C H A P T E R 19 DLPs D200 to D299 19 1 DLP D201 Apply a Lock On 19 1 DLP D202 Apply a Lockout 19 2 DLP D203 Clear a Lock On or Lockout 19 3 DLP D204 Clean Multi Fiber Optic Cable Connectors 19 3 DLP D205 Clean Fiber Connecto...

Страница 15: ...Roll 19 43 DLP D240 Cancel a Roll 19 43 DLP D241 Clear an MS SPRing Manual Ring Switch 19 44 DLP D242 Create an MS SPRing on a Single Node 19 45 DLP D243 Create a VLAN 19 46 DLP D244 Use the Reinitialization Tool to Clear the Database and Upload Software Windows 19 47 DLP D245 Use the Reinitialization Tool to Clear the Database and Upload Software UNIX 19 49 DLP D246 Provision E Series Ethernet Ca...

Страница 16: ...P D301 Initiate an MS SPRing Manual Ring Switch 20 2 DLP D303 Initiate an MS SPRing Force Ring Switch 20 3 DLP D309 View Ethernet MAC Address Table 20 4 DLP D310 View Ethernet Trunk Utilization 20 5 DLP D311 Provision a Half Circuit Source and Destination on an MS SPRing or 1 1 Node 20 5 DLP D312 Provision a Half Circuit Source and Destination on an SNCP Ring 20 6 DLP D314 Assign a Name to a Port ...

Страница 17: ...CC Termination 20 65 DLP D359 Change a Regenerator Section DCC Termination 20 65 DLP D360 Delete a Regenerator Section DCC Termination 20 66 DLP D361 Create a DCC Tunnel 20 66 DLP D362 Delete a Multiplex Section DCC Termination 20 68 DLP D363 Provision Regenerator Section DCC Terminations 20 68 DLP D364 Provision Multiplex Section DCC Terminations 20 71 DLP D367 Provision a J2 Path Trace on Circui...

Страница 18: ...stics PM Parameters 21 37 DLP D461 View FC_MR 4 Utilization PM Parameters 21 38 DLP D462 View FC_MR 4 History PM Parameters 21 39 DLP D463 Refresh FC_MR 4 PM Counts at a Different Time Interval 21 40 DLP D465 Create FC_MR 4 RMON Alarm Thresholds 21 40 DLP D466 Delete FC_MR 4 RMON Alarm Thresholds 21 44 DLP D468 Create a Two Fiber MS SPRing Using the MS SPRing Wizard 21 44 DLP D469 Create a Two Fib...

Страница 19: ...g Fiber Connection Example 5 12 Figure 5 4 Traditional Two Fiber MS SPRing DRI Fiber Connection Example 5 20 Figure 5 5 Integrated Two Fiber MS SPRing DRI Example 5 22 Figure 5 6 SNCP Fiber Connection Example 5 23 Figure 5 7 SNCP DRI Fiber Connection Example 5 27 Figure 5 8 Integrated SNCP DRI Example 5 29 Figure 5 9 Traditional MS SPRing to SNCP DRI Fiber Connection Example 5 31 Figure 5 10 Integ...

Страница 20: ... 3 Figure 13 2 Refibering the Protect Path 13 3 Figure 13 3 Linear ADM to MS SPRing Conversion 13 9 Figure 14 1 Three Node Two Fiber MS SPRing Before a Fourth Node Is Added 14 3 Figure 14 2 Three Node Four Fiber MS SPRing Before a Fourth Node is Added 14 4 Figure 14 3 Four Node Two Fiber MS SPRing Before a Node Is Removed 14 8 Figure 14 4 Selecting Protection Group Ports 14 17 Figure 14 5 Refiberi...

Страница 21: ...g or Disabling Pointer Justification Count Parameters 18 20 Figure 18 8 VC4 Tab for Enabling or Disabling IPPM 18 22 Figure 18 9 Selecting CTC Data For Print 18 38 Figure 18 10 Selecting CTC Data For Export 18 39 Figure 18 11 Defining the Circuit Source on an STM 16 Card 18 73 Figure 18 12 Ether Ports Statistics on the Card View Performance Window 18 76 Figure 18 13 Ether Ports Utilization on the ...

Страница 22: ...ure 20 11 Ether Ports on the Card View Performance Window 20 56 Figure 20 12 POS Ports on the Card View Performance Window 20 58 Figure 20 13 Verifying Pass Through VC4s 20 64 Figure 21 1 Viewing STM N Card Performance Monitoring Information 21 3 Figure 21 2 Network View Alarm Profiles Window 21 7 Figure 21 3 Store Profile s Dialog Box 21 8 Figure 21 4 Port Alarm Profile for an OC3 IR STM1 SH 1310...

Страница 23: ...VC12 or VC11 Circuits 6 4 Table 6 4 CTC Circuit Source and Destination Options for High Order VC4 Circuits 6 4 Table 12 1 Port Migration Information 12 13 Table 15 1 Audit Trail Column Definitions 15 11 Table 15 2 ONS 15454 SDH Timing Report 15 19 Table 15 3 Incompatibility Alarms 15 23 Table 17 1 Pin Connection of the Power FMECs 17 16 Table 17 2 TL1 Pin Assignments 17 71 Table 17 3 Alarm Column ...

Страница 24: ...eshold Options for E3 12 Cards 20 46 Table 20 17 SDH Threshold Options for E3 12 Cards 20 46 Table 20 18 Line Options for the DS3i N 12 Cards 20 47 Table 20 19 Line Threshold Options for the DS3i N 12 Cards 20 49 Table 20 20 Electrical Path Options for the DS3i N 12 Cards 20 50 Table 20 21 SDH Threshold Options for DS3i N 12 Cards 20 50 Table 20 22 Line Options for the STM1E 12 Card 20 51 Table 20...

Страница 25: ...MIBs 21 42 Table A 1 Change CTC Views A 2 Table A 2 Description of Node Icons on Network View Map A 3 Table A 3 CTC Menu and Toolbar Options A 5 Table A 4 CTC Window Mouse Shortcuts A 9 Table A 5 Performing Node View Card Shortcuts A 10 Table A 6 Performing Network Management Tasks in Network View A 11 Table A 7 Table Display Options A 12 ...

Страница 26: ...Tables vi Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide R7 0 78 17194 01 ...

Страница 27: ...r 1 17 NTP D13 Perform the Shelf Installation Acceptance Test 1 18 Install Cards and Fiber Optic Cable 2 1 NTP D15 Install the Common Control Cards 2 2 NTP D16 Install STM N Cards and Connectors 2 7 NTP D17 Install the Electrical Cards 2 10 NTP D18 Install Ethernet Cards and Connectors 2 11 NTP D286 Install the FC_MR 4 Cards 2 12 NTP D348 Install the Filler Cards 2 14 NTP D349 Install the Blank Fa...

Страница 28: ...vision a Linear ADM Network 5 7 NTP D340 Linear ADM Network Acceptance Test 5 8 NTP D40 Provision MS SPRing Nodes 5 10 NTP D41 Create the MS SPRing 5 13 NTP D341 Two Fiber MS SPRing Acceptance Test 5 14 NTP D342 Four Fiber MS SPRing Acceptance Test 5 16 NTP D304 Provision a Traditional MS SPRing Dual Ring Interconnect 5 18 NTP D305 Provision an Integrated MS SPRing Dual Ring Interconnect 5 21 NTP ...

Страница 29: ...Order Path Tunnel for Port Grouping 6 47 NTP D187 Create a Low Order Aggregation Point 6 50 NTP D135 Test Low Order Circuits 6 53 NTP D323 Create an Automatically Routed High Order Circuit 6 55 NTP D324 Create a Manually Routed High Order Circuit 6 60 NTP D190 Create a Unidirectional High Order Circuit with Multiple Drops 6 63 NTP D62 Test High Order Circuits 6 66 NTP D139 Create a Half Circuit on...

Страница 30: ...D352 Manage VLANs 7 11 Monitor Performance 8 1 NTP D257 Change the PM Display 8 2 NTP D195 Monitor Electrical Performance 8 3 NTP D198 Monitor Ethernet Performance 8 4 NTP D289 Create and Delete Ethernet RMON Thresholds 8 5 NTP D254 Monitor STM N Performance 8 5 NTP D301 Monitor FC_MR 4 Performance 8 6 NTP D302 Create or Delete FC_MR 4 RMON Thresholds 8 6 Manage Alarms 9 1 NTP D195 Document Existi...

Страница 31: ... 5 NTP D85 Change Node Timing 11 6 NTP D205 Modify Users and Change Security 11 7 NTP D87 Change SNMP Settings 11 7 Upgrade Cards and Spans 12 1 NTP D234 Upgrade the XC VXL 2 5G Card to the XC VXL 10G or XC VXC 10G Card 12 2 NTP D333 Upgrade the XC VXL 10G Card to the XC VXC 10G Card 12 4 NTP D314 Upgrade the TCC2 Card to the TCC2P Card 12 5 NTP D94 Upgrade STM N Cards and Spans Automatically 12 7...

Страница 32: ...d Manage OSI Information 15 8 NTP D163 Restore the Node to Factory Configuration 15 9 NTP D312 Viewing the Audit Trail Records 15 10 NTP D214 Off Load the Audit Trail Record 15 12 NTP D313 Off Load the Diagnostics File 15 13 NTP D231 Initiate or Clear an External Switching Command 15 14 NTP D112 Clean Fiber Connectors 15 15 NTP D153 Reset a Card Using CTC 15 16 NTP D215 View G Series Ethernet Main...

Страница 33: ...2 Install Fiber Optic Cables in a 1 1 Configuration 17 17 DLP D23 View Spanning Tree Information 17 19 DLP D24 Change an MS SPRing Node ID 17 19 DLP D25 Configure the CTC Alerts Dialog Box for Automatic Popup 17 20 DLP D26 Provision a VCAT Circuit Route 17 20 DLP D27 Delete Circuits 17 21 DLP D28 Create a Four Fiber MS SPRing Manually 17 22 DLP D29 Change Tunnel Type 17 24 DLP D30 Repair an IP Tun...

Страница 34: ...7 49 DLP D61 Create Login Node Groups 17 51 DLP D62 Add a Node to the Current Session or Login Group 17 53 DLP D64 Set the IP Address Default Router and Network Mask Using the LCD 17 53 DLP D65 Create a Static Route 17 56 DLP D67 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the ONS 15454 SDH 17 57 DLP D68 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the CTC Computer 17 57 DLP D69 Set Up External or Line Timing 17 5...

Страница 35: ...elete a Proxy Tunnel 18 1 DLP D101 Delete a Firewall Tunnel 18 1 DLP D102 Hard Reset a CE 100T 8 Card Using CTC 18 2 DLP D103 Soft Reset a CE100T 8 Card Using CTC 18 3 DLP D104 Install the Fiber Clip on 15454_MRC 12 Cards 18 3 DLP D105 Configure the Node for RADIUS Authentication 18 5 DLP D106 View and Terminate Active Logins 18 7 DLP D107 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Device 18 8 DLP D108 Change Lin...

Страница 36: ... DLP D144 Disable OSPF 18 36 DLP D145 Change the Network View Background Color 18 36 DLP D146 Print CTC Data 18 37 DLP D147 Export CTC Data 18 38 DLP D148 Create Domain Icons 18 40 DLP D149 Manage Domain Icons 18 41 DLP D150 Modify a 1 1 Protection Group 18 42 DLP D151 Set Up SNMP for a GNE 18 43 DLP D152 Modify a 1 N Protection Group 18 44 DLP D153 Set Up SNMP for an ENE 18 45 DLP D154 Modify a 1...

Страница 37: ...2 Delete an IP Over CLNS Tunnel 18 70 DLP D183 View IS IS Routing Information Base 18 70 DLP D184 View ES IS Routing Information Base 18 71 DLP D185 Manage the TARP Data Cache 18 72 DLP D186 Provision a Low Order VC11 Circuit Source and Destination 18 73 DLP D187 Provision a Low Order VC11 Circuit Route 18 74 DLP D188 View CE Series Ethernet and POS Ports Statistics PM Parameters 18 75 DLP D189 Ve...

Страница 38: ...s Ethernet Ports 19 18 DLP D221 Provision E Series Ethernet Ports for VLAN Membership 19 19 DLP D222 Provision G Series Ethernet Ports 19 21 DLP D223 Download an Alarm Severity Profile 19 22 DLP D224 Adjust the Java Virtual Memory Heap Size 19 23 DLP D225 Enable Alarm Filtering 19 24 DLP D227 Disable Alarm Filtering 19 25 DLP D229 View Circuits on a Span 19 25 DLP D230 Change a Circuit State 19 26...

Страница 39: ...me Interval 19 63 DLP D260 Set Auto Refresh Interval for Displayed PM Counts 19 64 DLP D261 Refresh PM Counts for a Different Port 19 65 DLP D262 Filter the Display of Circuits 19 65 DLP D263 Edit SNCP Dual Ring Interconnect Circuit Hold Off Timer 19 67 DLP D264 Provision a J1 Path Trace on Circuit Source and Destination Ports 19 68 DLP D265 Change the Login Legal Disclaimer 19 71 DLP D266 Change ...

Страница 40: ...8 Install 75 Ohm E 1 E 3 or STM 1 Coaxial Cables 20 17 DLP D329 Install 120 Ohm E 1 Cables with DB 37 Connectors to the FMECs 20 18 DLP D330 Install 120 Ohm E 1 Cables with Molex 96 Pin LFH Connectors 20 20 DLP D332 Install the TCC2 TCC2P Cards 20 22 DLP D333 Install the XC VXL 10G XC VXL 2 5G or XC VXC 10G Cards 20 25 DLP D334 Install the Alarm Interface Controller International Card 20 26 DLP D3...

Страница 41: ...ual or Force Switched Node Timing Reference 20 76 DLP D370 View Circuit Information 20 76 DLP D371 View the MS SPRing Squelch Table 20 80 DLP D372 Import a Cisco MetroPlanner Configuration File 20 81 DLP D388 Verify MS SPRing Extension Byte Mapping 20 81 DLP D393 Switch Between TDM and DWDM Network Views 20 82 DLPs D400 to D499 21 1 DLP D420 Install the Public Key Security Certificate 21 1 DLP D42...

Страница 42: ...ers 21 37 DLP D461 View FC_MR 4 Utilization PM Parameters 21 38 DLP D462 View FC_MR 4 History PM Parameters 21 39 DLP D463 Refresh FC_MR 4 PM Counts at a Different Time Interval 21 40 DLP D465 Create FC_MR 4 RMON Alarm Thresholds 21 40 DLP D466 Delete FC_MR 4 RMON Alarm Thresholds 21 44 DLP D468 Create a Two Fiber MS SPRing Using the MS SPRing Wizard 21 44 DLP D469 Create a Two Fiber MS SPRing Man...

Страница 43: ...DH Shelf 17 15 DLP D18 Turn On and Verify Office Power 17 16 DLP D22 Install Fiber Optic Cables in a 1 1 Configuration 17 17 DLP D23 View Spanning Tree Information 17 19 DLP D24 Change an MS SPRing Node ID 17 19 DLP D25 Configure the CTC Alerts Dialog Box for Automatic Popup 17 20 DLP D26 Provision a VCAT Circuit Route 17 20 DLP D27 Delete Circuits 17 21 DLP D28 Create a Four Fiber MS SPRing Manua...

Страница 44: ...ng Internet Explorer Windows 17 47 DLP D57 Disable Proxy Service Using Netscape Windows and UNIX 17 48 DLP D60 Log into CTC 17 49 DLP D61 Create Login Node Groups 17 51 DLP D62 Add a Node to the Current Session or Login Group 17 53 DLP D64 Set the IP Address Default Router and Network Mask Using the LCD 17 53 DLP D65 Create a Static Route 17 56 DLP D67 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the ONS 1...

Страница 45: ...vision a High Order Circuit Route 17 96 DLP D99 Determine Available VLANs 17 98 DLP D100 Delete a Proxy Tunnel 18 1 DLP D101 Delete a Firewall Tunnel 18 1 DLP D102 Hard Reset a CE 100T 8 Card Using CTC 18 2 DLP D103 Soft Reset a CE100T 8 Card Using CTC 18 3 DLP D104 Install the Fiber Clip on 15454_MRC 12 Cards 18 3 DLP D105 Configure the Node for RADIUS Authentication 18 5 DLP D106 View and Termin...

Страница 46: ... and CE 1000 4 POS Ports 18 33 DLP D142 Modify a Static Route 18 34 DLP D143 Delete a Static Route 18 35 DLP D144 Disable OSPF 18 36 DLP D145 Change the Network View Background Color 18 36 DLP D146 Print CTC Data 18 37 DLP D147 Export CTC Data 18 38 DLP D148 Create Domain Icons 18 40 DLP D149 Manage Domain Icons 18 41 DLP D150 Modify a 1 1 Protection Group 18 42 DLP D151 Set Up SNMP for a GNE 18 4...

Страница 47: ...ork Point of Attachment 18 68 DLP D181 Edit an IP Over CLNS Tunnel 18 69 DLP D182 Delete an IP Over CLNS Tunnel 18 70 DLP D183 View IS IS Routing Information Base 18 70 DLP D184 View ES IS Routing Information Base 18 71 DLP D185 Manage the TARP Data Cache 18 72 DLP D186 Provision a Low Order VC11 Circuit Source and Destination 18 73 DLP D187 Provision a Low Order VC11 Circuit Route 18 74 DLP D188 ...

Страница 48: ...Tunnel Route 19 18 DLP D220 Provision E Series Ethernet Ports 19 18 DLP D221 Provision E Series Ethernet Ports for VLAN Membership 19 19 DLP D222 Provision G Series Ethernet Ports 19 21 DLP D223 Download an Alarm Severity Profile 19 22 DLP D224 Adjust the Java Virtual Memory Heap Size 19 23 DLP D225 Enable Alarm Filtering 19 24 DLP D227 Disable Alarm Filtering 19 25 DLP D229 View Circuits on a Spa...

Страница 49: ...D259 Refresh Ethernet PM Counts at a Different Time Interval 19 63 DLP D260 Set Auto Refresh Interval for Displayed PM Counts 19 64 DLP D261 Refresh PM Counts for a Different Port 19 65 DLP D262 Filter the Display of Circuits 19 65 DLP D263 Edit SNCP Dual Ring Interconnect Circuit Hold Off Timer 19 67 DLP D264 Provision a J1 Path Trace on Circuit Source and Destination Ports 19 68 DLP D265 Change ...

Страница 50: ...16 DLP D328 Install 75 Ohm E 1 E 3 or STM 1 Coaxial Cables 20 17 DLP D329 Install 120 Ohm E 1 Cables with DB 37 Connectors to the FMECs 20 18 DLP D330 Install 120 Ohm E 1 Cables with Molex 96 Pin LFH Connectors 20 20 DLP D332 Install the TCC2 TCC2P Cards 20 22 DLP D333 Install the XC VXL 10G XC VXL 2 5G or XC VXC 10G Cards 20 25 DLP D334 Install the Alarm Interface Controller International Card 20...

Страница 51: ...Node Timing Reference 20 76 DLP D370 View Circuit Information 20 76 DLP D371 View the MS SPRing Squelch Table 20 80 DLP D372 Import a Cisco MetroPlanner Configuration File 20 81 DLP D388 Verify MS SPRing Extension Byte Mapping 20 81 DLP D393 Switch Between TDM and DWDM Network Views 20 82 DLP D420 Install the Public Key Security Certificate 21 1 DLP D421 View STM N PM Parameters 21 2 DLP D422 Chan...

Страница 52: ...ilization PM Parameters 21 38 DLP D462 View FC_MR 4 History PM Parameters 21 39 DLP D463 Refresh FC_MR 4 PM Counts at a Different Time Interval 21 40 DLP D465 Create FC_MR 4 RMON Alarm Thresholds 21 40 DLP D466 Delete FC_MR 4 RMON Alarm Thresholds 21 44 DLP D468 Create a Two Fiber MS SPRing Using the MS SPRing Wizard 21 44 DLP D469 Create a Two Fiber MS SPRing Manually 21 46 DLP D470 Manually Rout...

Страница 53: ...n feature which may be used in any topological network configuration Cisco does not recommend using its path protection feature in any particular topological network configuration This section explains the objectives intended audience and organization of this publication and describes the conventions that convey instructions and other information This section provides the following information Rev...

Страница 54: ...note in NTP D333 Upgrade the XC VXL 10G Card to the XC VXC 10G Card in Chapter 12 Upgrade Cards and Spans November 2008 Added new DLPs A596 and A597 Added a note on displayof port name in circuit table in the procedures to provision Ethernet and POS ports for CE Series and ML Series cards March 2009 Removed references to AIP in the following sections Table 20 32 in Chapter 20 DLPs D300 to D399 DLP...

Страница 55: ...lation and then turn over the site to craft personnel for verification provisioning turn up and acceptance The front matter of the book appears in the following sequence 1 Title Page 2 Table of Contents 3 List of Figures 4 List of Tables 5 List of Procedures 6 List of Tasks January 2010 Updated the section NTP D94 Upgrade STM N Cards and Spans Automatically in the chapter Upgrade Cards and Spans U...

Страница 56: ...s optical cards transponder and muxponder cards electrical cards Ethernet cards and connectors the FC_MR 4 card and DWDM cards Also included are procedures for removing and replacing a card preprovisioning a slot and installing and routing fiber optic cables Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI Includes procedures to install the Cisco Transport Controller CTC set up a computer for differe...

Страница 57: ...pter 12 Upgrade Cards and Spans Includes procedures to prevent an STM N protection switch during cross connect upgrades upgrade or downgrade cards and upgrade spans automatically or manually Chapter 13 Convert Network Configurations Includes procedures to convert network configurations modify an MS SPRing and manage MS SPRing switches Chapter 14 Add and Remove Nodes Includes procedures to add and ...

Страница 58: ...etailed card specifications hardware and software feature descriptions network topology information and network element defaults Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide Provides general troubleshooting procedures alarm descriptions and troubleshooting procedures transient conditions and error messages Cisco ONS 15454 SDH TL1 Command Guide Provides a full Transaction Language One TL1 command and ...

Страница 59: ... and keywords in body text italic Command input that is supplied by the user Keywords or arguments that appear within square brackets are optional x x x A choice of keywords represented by x appears in braces separated by vertical bars The user must select one Ctrl The control key For example where Ctrl D is written hold down the Control key while pressing the D key screen font Examples of informa...

Страница 60: ...toa huomioi sähköpiirien käsittelemiseen liittyvät riskit ja tutustu onnettomuuksien yleisiin ehkäisytapoihin Turvallisuusvaroitusten käännökset löytyvät laitteen mukana toimitettujen käännettyjen turvallisuusvaroitusten joukosta varoitusten lopussa näkyvien lausuntonumeroiden avulla SÄILYTÄ NÄMÄ OHJEET Attention IMPORTANTES INFORMATIONS DE SÉCURITÉ Ce symbole d avertissement indique un danger Vou...

Страница 61: ...ão que poderá ser causadora de lesões corporais Antes de iniciar a utilização de qualquer equipamento tenha conhecimento dos perigos envolvidos no manuseio de circuitos elétricos e familiarize se com as práticas habituais de prevenção de acidentes Utilize o número da instrução fornecido ao final de cada aviso para localizar sua tradução nos avisos de segurança traduzidos que acompanham este dispos...

Страница 62: ...xxii Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide R7 0 78 17194 01 About this Guide ...

Страница 63: ...ção fornecido ao final de cada aviso para localizar sua tradução nos avisos de segurança traduzidos que acompanham o dispositivo GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUÇÕES Advarsel VIGTIGE SIKKERHEDSANVISNINGER Dette advarselssymbol betyder fare Du befinder dig i en situation med risiko for legemesbeskadigelse Før du begynder arbejde på udstyr skal du være opmærksom på de involverede risici der er ved elektriske kre...

Страница 64: ...xxiv Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide R7 0 78 17194 01 About this Guide ...

Страница 65: ...co Optical Networking Product Documentation CD ROM Optical networking related documentation including Cisco ONS 15xxx product documentation is available in a CD ROM package that ships with your product The Optical Networking Product Documentation CD ROM is updated periodically and may be more current than printed documentation Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request For informatio...

Страница 66: ...xxvi Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide R7 0 78 17194 01 About this Guide ...

Страница 67: ... 7 Complete this procedure to access the electrical facility connection assembly EFCA for the front mount electrical connections FMECs before continuing with other procedures in this chapter 5 NTP D220 Install the Power and Signal FMECs page 1 7 Complete this procedure if you plan to install electrical cards This procedure is a prerequisite to the NTP D224 Install the Electrical Card Cables on the...

Страница 68: ...ssible two poled disconnect device must be incorporated in the fixed wiring Statement 91 Note The ONS 15454 SDH is suitable for mounting on concrete or other noncombustible surfaces only Note In this chapter shelf assembly refers to the steel enclosure that holds cards and connects power and node refers to the entire hardware and software system Required Tools and Equipment You need the following ...

Страница 69: ...sh 55 dB or better for optical cards Coaxial cable terminated with 1 0 2 3 miniature coax connectors for FMEC cards DB 37 cable Shielded building integrated timing supply BITS clock coaxial cable terminated with 1 0 2 3 miniature coax connectors Labels Table 1 1 Cable Models and Model Numbers Cable Model Type Model Number Description Power Cables 15454E PWRCBL xxx Power cable assembly DB 3 connect...

Страница 70: ...e into the lug Wire stripping tool Test Equipment To install the ONS 15454 SDH you need the following test equipment Voltmeter Power meter only for use with fiber optics Bit error rate BER tester for E1 N 14 E1 42 E3 12 DS3i N 12 STM1E 12 and FMEC cards NTP D1 Unpack and Inspect the ONS 15454 SDH Shelf Assembly Step 1 Complete the DLP D1 Unpack and Verify the Shelf Assembly task on page 17 1 Step ...

Страница 71: ... do not operate it in an area that exceeds the maximum recommended ambient temperature of 55 C 113 F Statement 1047 Warning Installation of the equipment must comply with local and national electrical codes Statement 1074 Warning Take care when connecting units to the supply circuit so that wiring is not overloaded Statement 1018 Warning Only trained and qualified personnel should be allowed to in...

Страница 72: ...mblies in a Rack page 17 7 Step 2 Continue with the NTP D3 Open and Remove the Front Door procedure on page 1 6 Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D3 Open and Remove the Front Door Step 1 Complete the DLP D8 Open the Front Cabinet Compartment Door task on page 17 9 Warning To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack you must take special precautions to ensure th...

Страница 73: ...e NTP D220 Install the Power and Signal FMECs Purpose This procedure opens and removes the FMEC cover The ONS 15454 SDH has a screw in panel over the EFCA The FMEC cover protects the FMEC cards Tools Equipment Medium slot head screwdriver Prerequisite Procedures NTP D2 Install the Shelf Assembly page 1 5 Required As Needed Required Onsite Remote Onsite Security Level None Purpose This procedure in...

Страница 74: ...cards can be installed in Slots 18 to 21 The FMEC E1 120PROB card can be installed in Slots 26 to 29 FMEC E3 DS3 FMEC STM1E NP FMEC STM1E 1 1 and FMEC STM1E 1 3 cards can be installed in Slots 18 to 21 or Slots 26 to 29 Slot assignment is as follows FMEC Slot 18 supports an electrical card in Slot 1 FMEC Slot 19 supports an electrical card in Slot 2 FMEC Slot 20 supports an electrical card in Slot...

Страница 75: ... SDH FMECs plug into electrical connectors on the back panel of the shelf assembly when the screws are tightened Figure 1 1 shows FMEC installation Figure 1 1 Installing FMECs on the ONS 15454 SDH Step 5 Tighten the screws Step 6 Continue with the NTP D6 Install the Power and Ground procedure on page 1 10 Stop You have completed this procedure 61338 FAN FAIL CR IT MAJ MIN Mounting screws Guide rai...

Страница 76: ...tection to be provided as part of the building installation Install only in accordance with national and local wiring regulations Statement 1045 Purpose This procedure installs power feeds and grounds the ONS 15454 SDH Tools Equipment 2 Phillips screwdriver Medium slot head screwdriver Small slot head screwdriver Screws Power cable from fuse panel to MIC A P and to MIC C T P shipped with the ONS 1...

Страница 77: ...ssis fuses rating does not exceed 30A Step 2 Complete the DLP D16 Connect the Office Ground to the ONS 15454 SDH task on page 17 13 Step 3 Complete the DLP D17 Connect Office Power to the ONS 15454 SDH Shelf task on page 17 15 Step 4 Complete the DLP D18 Turn On and Verify Office Power task on page 17 16 Step 5 Continue with the NTP D7 Install the Fan Tray Assembly procedure on page 1 11 Stop You ...

Страница 78: ...ly The fan tray assembly has locks on the outer edges Press and hold the locks as you slide the fan tray assembly into the shelf assembly The electrical plug at the rear of the tray should plug into the corresponding receptacle on the assembly Caution Do not force a fan tray assembly into place This can damage the connectors on the fan tray assembly and or the connectors on the back panel of the s...

Страница 79: ... shows the rack mounting for the E1 75 120 conversion panel Purpose This procedure installs the E1 75 120 conversion panel You need an E1 75 120 conversion panel if you want to convert the balanced 120 ohm interfaces of the E1 42 card and the corresponding FMECs to unbalanced 75 ohm interfaces Tools Equipment 2 Phillips screwdriver Medium slot head screwdriver Small slot head screwdriver 96 conduc...

Страница 80: ...screw holes on the mounting ears with the mounting holes in the rack Step 3 Install one mounting screw in each side of the assembly Step 4 When the E1 75 120 conversion panel is secured to the rack install the remaining mounting screws if necessary Step 5 Continue with the NTP D223 Attach Wires to Alarm Timing LAN and Craft Pin Connections procedure on page 1 15 Stop You have completed this proced...

Страница 81: ...n page 20 16 as needed LAN wires or the LAN port on the TCC2 TCC2P card are necessary to create an external LAN connection Step 4 Complete the DLP D78 Install the TL1 Craft Interface on the MIC C T P task on page 17 70 as needed Craft wires or the EIA TIA 232 port on the TCC2 TCC2P cards are required to access Transaction Language One TL1 using the craft interface Step 5 Continue with the NTP D224...

Страница 82: ...e coaxial cables tie wrap or lace the coaxial cables according to local site practice and route the cables through the side cutouts on either side of the ONS 15454 SDH The rubber coated edges of the side cutouts prevent the cables from chafing Purpose This procedure installs cables for electrical cards via the FMECs You will install the electrical cards in Chapter 2 Install Cards and Fiber Optic C...

Страница 83: ...mpleted this procedure NTP D226 Install and Close the FMEC Cover Step 1 Insert the cover carefully onto the left pin of the hinge Figure 1 4 Step 2 Move the cover to the right side towards the right pin of the hinge Step 3 Pull the right side of the hinge locking spring Figure 1 4 Push the cover onto the right pin until the spring snaps into place Purpose This procedure installs and closes the rea...

Страница 84: ...over Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D13 Perform the Shelf Installation Acceptance Test Step 1 Complete Table 1 2 by verifying that each applicable procedure was completed 71087 FAN FAIL CR IT MAJ MIN Pin hinge FMEC cover Hinge locking spring Purpose Use this procedure to perform a shelf installation acceptance test Tools Equipment Voltmeter Oval and or block ferrites Prerequisite Proce...

Страница 85: ...Description Completed NTP D1 Unpack and Inspect the ONS 15454 SDH Shelf Assembly page 1 4 NTP D2 Install the Shelf Assembly page 1 5 NTP D3 Open and Remove the Front Door page 1 6 NTP D219 Open and Remove the FMEC Cover page 1 7 NTP D220 Install the Power and Signal FMECs page 1 7 NTP D6 Install the Power and Ground page 1 10 NTP D7 Install the Fan Tray Assembly page 1 11 NTP D222 Install the E1 7...

Страница 86: ...1 20 Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide R7 0 78 17194 01 Chapter 1 Install the Shelf and FMECs NTP D13 Perform the Shelf Installation Acceptance Test ...

Страница 87: ...plete this procedure as needed 8 NTP D19 Install Fiber Optic Cables on Optical Cards page 2 16 Complete this procedure as needed 9 NTP D245 Route Fiber Optic Cables page 2 19 Complete this procedure as needed 10 NTP D227 Remove and Replace a Card page 2 20 Complete this procedure as needed to remove and replace a card including deleting the card from Cisco Transport Controller CTC and changing an ...

Страница 88: ...the cards remove the clips before installing the cards Note If you install a card incorrectly the FAIL LED flashes continuously Step 1 If you plan to install XC VXL 2 5G cards review Table 2 1 on page 2 3 to determine card slot compatibility If you plan to install XC VXL 10G or XC VXC 10G cards review Table 2 2 on page 2 5 to determine card slot compatibility Step 2 Complete the DLP D332 Install t...

Страница 89: ...4 Install the Alarm Interface Controller International Card task on page 20 26 if necessary In Table 2 1 X indicates that a card is supported in the slot The multiservice traffic slots Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 include four slots Slots 5 6 12 and 13 that have four times the bandwidth of the other multiservice slots 61239 FAN FAIL CR IT MAJ MIN Guide rail Ejector Table 2 1 ONS 15454 SDH Card and Sl...

Страница 90: ...310 X X X X X X X X X X X X OC3IR STM1 SH 1310 8 X X X X X X X X OC12 IR STM4 SH 1310 X X X X X X X X X X X X OC12 LR STM4 LH 1310 X X X X X X X X X X X X OC12 LR STM4 LH 1550 X X X X X X X X X X X X OC12 LR STM4 LH 1310 4 X X X X X X X X OC12 LR STM4 LH 1550 X X X X X X X X X X X X OC48 IR STM16 SH AS 1310 X X X X X X X X X X X X OC48 LR STM16 LH AS 1550 X X X X X X X X X X X X OC48 ELR STM16 EH ...

Страница 91: ...cards Requires XC VXL 10G or XC VXC 10G cards OC192SR1 STM64IO Short Reach and OC192 STM64 Any Reach3 Not supported with XC VXL 2 5G cards Requires XC VXL 10G or XC VXC 10G cards 1 The term XC is used generically to mean cross connect card 2 Designated as MRC 12 in CTC 3 Designated as STM64 XFP in CTC Table 2 1 ONS 15454 SDH Card and Slot Compatibility for the XC VXL 2 5G Cards continued Slot 1 2 ...

Страница 92: ... X X X X OC12 LR STM4 LH 1310 X X X X X X X X X X X X OC12 LR STM4 LH 1550 X X X X X X X X X X X X OC12 LR STM4 LH 1310 4 X X X X X X X X OC12 LR STM4 LH 1550 X X X X X X X X X X X X OC48 IR STM16 SH AS 1310 X X X X X X X X X X X X OC48 LR STM16 LH AS 1550 X X X X X X X X X X X X OC48 ELR STM16 EH 100 GHz X X X X X X X X X X X X OC192 SR STM64 IO 1310 X X X X OC192 IR STM64 SH 1550 X X X X OC192 L...

Страница 93: ... X X X X X X X X X X 1 The term XC is used generically to mean cross connect card 2 Designated as STM64 XFP in CTC 3 Designated as MRC 12 in CTC Table 2 2 Slot Compatibility for the XC VXL 10G or XC VXC 10G Card continued Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Type MS MS MS MS MS MS TCC2 TCC2P XC1 AIC I XC1 TCC2 TCC2P MS MS MS MS MS MS Purpose This procedure installs the optical cards STM ...

Страница 94: ...k connection protection SNCP to multiplex section shared protection ring MS SPRing conversion and node addition install optical cards according to an east Slots 12 and 13 to west Slots 5 and 6 configuration This configuration is not mandatory Note If you install a card incorrectly the FAIL LED flashes continuously Note During the boot process a Locked enabled disabled STM N port will output a line...

Страница 95: ...d turn off for 5 to 10 seconds The ACT or ACT STBY LED turns on The signal fail SF LED can persist until all card ports connect to their far end counterparts and a signal is present Note The booting STM N card will send an AIS L to the far end receiver as long as it is Locked enabled disabled Step 6 If the card does not boot up properly or the LED activity does not mimic Step 5 check the following...

Страница 96: ...er capacity cards first for example install an E3 12 card before installing an E1 14 card Let each card boot completely before installing the next card Note Cisco recommends installing STM N transponder TXP and muxponder MXP cards before you install electrical cards as applicable Step 1 If you installed XC VXL 2 5G cards review Table 2 1 on page 2 3 to determine card slot compatibility If you inst...

Страница 97: ... slot provisioned for a different card all LEDs turn off Note If the red FAIL LED is on continuously or the LEDs behave erratically the card is not installed properly Remove the card and repeat Steps 2 to 5 Step 6 Continue with the NTP D18 Install Ethernet Cards and Connectors procedure on page 2 11 if necessary Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D18 Install Ethernet Cards and Connectors W...

Страница 98: ...ards review Table 2 2 on page 2 5 to determine card slot compatibility Step 2 Complete the DLP D39 Install Ethernet Cards task on page 17 30 Allow each card to boot completely before installing the next card Step 3 Complete the DLP D335 Install GBIC or SFP XFP Devices task on page 20 28 if you are using E1000 2 G G1K 4 ML1000 2 ML100X 8 or CE 1000 4 cards Note If you need to remove a Gigabit Inter...

Страница 99: ...ow the card to cool before touching any other part of it or before placing it in an antistatic bag Statement 201 Step 1 If you installed XC VXL 2 5G cards review Table 2 1 on page 2 3 to determine card slot compatibility If you installed XC VXL 10G or XC VXC 10G cards review Table 2 2 on page 2 5 to determine card slot compatibility Step 2 Open the card latches ejectors Step 3 Use the latches ejec...

Страница 100: ...ss all cards and faceplates are in place Statement 156 Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454_SDH Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower right outside edge of the shelf assembly and ensure the shelf assembly is properly grounded Step 1 Open the card ejectors Purpose This procedure explains how to install the filler cards in any ...

Страница 101: ...ated on the lower right outside edge of the shelf assembly and ensure the shelf assembly is properly grounded Step 1 With screws attach the blank faceplate so that it covers the empty unused FMEC slot Step 2 Repeat for any remaining unused FMEC slots Stop You have completed this procedure Purpose This procedure explains how to install the blank faceplates in any unused FMEC slot A blank faceplate ...

Страница 102: ...nt 293 Caution Do not use fiber loopbacks with the STM64 LH 1550 or STM64 LH ITU 15xx xx card unless you are using a 20 dB attentuator Never connect a direct fiber loopback Using fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the STM64 LH 1550 or STM64 LH ITU 15xx xx card Caution Do not use fiber loopbacks with the STM64 SH 1550 card unless you are using a 5 dB attentuator Never connect a direct una...

Страница 103: ...0 15 dBm 8 dBm 28 dBm 8 dBm OC12 LR STM4 LH 1310 3 dBm 2 dBm 28 dBm 8 dBm OC12 LR STM4 LH 1550 3 dBm 2 dBm 28 dBm 8 dBm OC12 IR STM4 SH 1310 4 15 dBm 8 dBm 30 dBm 8 dBm OC48 IR STM16 SH AS 1310 5 dBm 0 dBm 18 dBm 0 dBm OC48 LR STM16 LH AS 1550 2 dBm 3 dBm 28 dBm 8 dBm OC48 ELR STM16 EH 100 GHz 2 dBm 0 dBm 27 dBm at 1E 12 BER 9 dBm OC192 SR STM64 IO 1310 6 dBm 1 dBm 11 dBm 1 dBm OC192 IR STM64 SH 1...

Страница 104: ...gurations task on page 20 33 Step 6 As needed complete the DLP D338 Install Fiber Optic Cables for MS SPRing Configurations task on page 20 37 Step 7 Continue with the NTP D245 Route Fiber Optic Cables procedure on page 2 19 Stop You have completed this procedure 15454_MRC 121 ONS SI 155 L1 5 dBm 0 dBm 34 dBm 10 dBm 15454_MRC 121 ONS SI 155 L2 5 dBm 0 dBm 34 dBm 10 dBm 15454_MRC 121 ONS_SE 155 147...

Страница 105: ... to the faceplate of the STM N cards Step 4 If you installed a 15454_MRC 12 card complete the DLP D104 Install the Fiber Clip on 15454_MRC 12 Cards task on page 18 3 The 15454_MRC 12 cards are shipped with two versions of a fiber clip that plug into the faceplate The clip must be selected according to the cabinet door depth Use the short clip with the standard door and the long clip with the exten...

Страница 106: ...r cables in the front compartment are properly routed Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D227 Remove and Replace a Card Step 1 If you are not logged into CTC and you need to remove a card remove the card as described in Step 3 When you log into CTC troubleshoot the mismatched equipment alarm MEA using the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide 61238 Tx Rx FAIL ACT SF Faceplate connector...

Страница 107: ...D16 Install STM N Cards and Connectors page 2 7 NTP D17 Install the Electrical Cards page 2 10 NTP D18 Install Ethernet Cards and Connectors page 2 11 NTP D286 Install the FC_MR 4 Cards page 2 12 Step 5 As needed continue with the NTP D19 Install Fiber Optic Cables on Optical Cards procedure on page 2 16 Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D20 Replace the Front Door Note Be careful not to c...

Страница 108: ...th Hinges and Ground Wire Step 3 Swing the door closed Note The ONS 15454 SDH comes with a pinned hex key tool for locking and unlocking the front door Turn the key counterclockwise to unlock the door and clockwise to lock it Stop You have completed this procedure 61237 FAN FAIL CR IT MAJ MIN Door hinge Assembly hinge pin Assembly hinge Translucent circles for LED viewing ...

Страница 109: ...cable tasks DLPs 1 NTP D278 Set Up Computer for CTC page 3 2 Complete this procedure if your PC or workstation has never been connected to an ONS 15454 SDH 2 NTP D260 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the ONS 15454 SDH page 3 3 Complete this procedure to set up your computer for an onsite craft connection to the ONS 15454 SDH 3 NTP D261 Set Up a Computer for a Corporate LAN Connect...

Страница 110: ...on page 21 21 Step 5 When your PC or workstation is set up continue with the setup procedure appropriate to your network NTP D260 Set Up CTC Computer for Local Craft Connection to the ONS 15454 SDH page 3 3 NTP D261 Set Up a Computer for a Corporate LAN Connection to the ONS 15454 SDH page 3 5 NTP D262 Set Up a Remote Access Connection to the ONS 15454 SDH page 3 6 Note Cisco recommends that you c...

Страница 111: ... ONS 15454 SDH CTC Connection Environment CTC Computer Setup Task You are connecting from a Windows PC You will connect to one ONS 15454 SDH You need to access non ONS 15454 SDH applications such as ping and tracert trace route DLP D50 Set Up a Windows PC for Craft Connection to an ONS 15454 SDH on the Same Subnet Using Static IP Addresses page 17 37 You are connecting from a Windows PC The CTC co...

Страница 112: ...pplicable Stop You have completed this procedure You are connecting from a Windows PC All nodes that you will access run Software Release 3 3 or later You will connect to ONS 15454 SDH nodes at different locations and times and do not wish to reconfigure your PC IP settings each time You do not need to access or use non ONS 15454 SDH applications such as ping and tracert trace route You will conne...

Страница 113: ...tion NIC card to a corporate LAN port Step 3 If your computer is connected to a proxy server disable proxy service or add the ONS 15454 SDH nodes as exceptions To disable proxy service complete one of the following tasks depending on the web browser you use DLP D56 Disable Proxy Service Using Internet Explorer Windows page 17 47 DLP D57 Disable Proxy Service Using Netscape Windows and UNIX page 17...

Страница 114: ...n an IP address to the modem that is on the same subnet as the ONS 15454 SDH The IP address the modem assigns to the CTC computer must be on the same subnet as the modem and the ONS 15454 SDH Step 3 Continue with the NTP D23 Log into the ONS 15454 SDH GUI procedure on page 3 7 Stop You have completed this procedure Purpose This procedure connects the CTC computer to an ONS 15454 SDH using a LAN mo...

Страница 115: ...ade is complete Step 2 As needed complete the DLP D61 Create Login Node Groups task on page 17 51 Login node groups allow you to manage nodes that are not connected to the login node through a data communications channel DCC Step 3 As needed complete the DLP D62 Add a Node to the Current Session or Login Group task on page 17 53 Step 4 As needed complete the DLP D35 Delete a Node from the Current ...

Страница 116: ...3 8 Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide R7 0 78 17194 01 Chapter 3 Connect the PC and Log into the GUI NTP D23 Log into the ONS 15454 SDH GUI ...

Страница 117: ...me Date Time and Contact Information page 4 4 Continue with this procedure to set the node name date time location and contact information 4 NTP D279 Set Power Monitor Thresholds page 4 6 Continue with this procedure to set the node battery power thresholds 5 NTP D169 Set Up CTC Network Access page 4 7 Continue with this procedure to provision the IP address default router subnet mask and network ...

Страница 118: ...is illuminated on one cross connect card and the amber STBY standby LED is illuminated on the second cross connect card Note If the cross connect cards are not installed or if their LEDs are not illuminated as described do not proceed Repeat the DLP D333 Install the XC VXL 10G XC VXL 2 5G or XC VXC 10G Cards task on page 20 25 or refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide to resolve in...

Страница 119: ...2 5G MXPP_MR_2 5G MXP_2 5G_10G TXP_MR_10E TXP_MR_10E_L TXP_MR_10E_C and MXP_2 5G_10E MXP_2 5G_10E_C MXP_2 5G_10E_L MXP_MR_10DME_L or MXP_MR_10DME_C verify that they are installed in Slots 1 to 6 or 12 to 17 and have GBIC or SFP connectors are installed For information about installing and provisioning TXP and MXP cards refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide Step 12 If Fibre Channel FC_M...

Страница 120: ... the security policy settings complete the NTP D205 Modify Users and Change Security procedure on page 11 7 Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D316 Set Up Name Date Time and Contact Information Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 for the node you will turn up If you are already logged in continue with Step 2 Step 2 Click the Provisioning General tabs Purpose This pr...

Страница 121: ...Time fields The ONS 15454 SDH will use these fields for alarm dates and times By default CTC displays all alarms in the CTC computer time zone for consistency To change the display to the node time zone complete the DLP D112 Display Alarms and Conditions Using Time Zone task on page 18 15 Note Using an NTP or SNTP server ensures that all ONS 15454 SDH network nodes use the same date and time refer...

Страница 122: ...r Thresholds procedure on page 4 6 Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D279 Set Power Monitor Thresholds Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 for the node you will set up If you are already logged in continue with Step 2 Step 2 In node view click the Provisioning General Power Monitor tabs Step 3 To change the extreme low battery voltage threshold in 0 5 VDC increment...

Страница 123: ...ete the DLP D84 Enable Node Security Mode task on page 17 77 Step 4 If static routes are needed complete the DLP D65 Create a Static Route task on page 17 56 Refer to the CTC Network Connectivity chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual for further information about static routes Step 5 If the ONS 15454 SDH is connected to a LAN or WAN that uses OSPF and you want to share routing inform...

Страница 124: ...IIOP Listener Port on the ONS 15454 SDH task on page 17 57 Figure 4 1 shows ONS 15454 SDH nodes in a protected network and the CTC computer in an external network For the computer to access the ONS 15454 SDH nodes you must provision the IIOP listener port specified by your firewall administrator on the ONS 15454 SDH Purpose This procedure enables EMS secure access This procedure enables enhanced S...

Страница 125: ...C Computer and ONS 15454 SDH Nodes Residing Behind Firewalls Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D28 Set Up Timing 61331 CTC computer External network Protected network ONS 15454 SDH Unprotected network Private network IIOP port IIOP port Firewall Port filtering ONS 15454 SDH 61330 CTC computer Firewall Port filtering Protected network External network Protected network ONS 15454 SDH Privat...

Страница 126: ...tep 2 an external BITS source is not available This task can only provide SETS timing Note For information about SDH timing refer to the Timing chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual or ITU T G 784 Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D170 Create Protection Groups Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 at the node where you want to create the protection grou...

Страница 127: ...refer to the Card Protection chapter and the card reference material specific to the card in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual 1 1 Any STM N Pairs a working STM N card port with a protect STM N card port For multiport STM N cards the protect port must match the working port on the working card For example Port 1 of an STM 1 card can only be protected by Port 1 of another STM 1 card The port...

Страница 128: ...ith Step 2 Step 2 In node view click the Provisioning SNMP tabs Step 3 In the Trap Destinations area click Create Splitter TXPP_MR_2 5G MXPP_MR_2 5G Splitter protection is automatically provided with the TXPP_MR_2 5G and MXPP_MR_2 5G cards For more information refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide Unprotected Any Unprotected cards can cause signal loss if a card fails or incurs a signa...

Страница 129: ...e information about provisioning the UDP port is also given in the DLP D151 Set Up SNMP for a GNE task on page 18 43 and DLP D153 Set Up SNMP for an ENE task on page 18 45 Trap Version Choose either SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 Refer to your NMS documentation to determine whether to use SNMP v1 or v2 Figure 4 3 Creating an SNMP Trap Destination Step 5 Click OK The node IP address of the node where you provisi...

Страница 130: ...P D166 Provision or Modify TARP Operating Parameters page 18 55 Complete this task next DLP D167 Add a Static TID to NSAP Entry to the TARP Data Cache page 18 57 Complete this task as needed DLP D169 Add a TARP Manual Adjacency Table Entry page 18 58 Complete this task as needed DLP D171 Provision OSI Routers page 18 59 Complete this task as needed DLP D172 Provision Additional Manual Area Address...

Страница 131: ... you create a linear ADM 6 NTP D40 Provision MS SPRing Nodes page 5 10 Complete this procedure to provision ONS 15454 SDHs in a two fiber or four fiber MS SPRing 7 NTP D41 Create the MS SPRing page 5 13 Complete this procedure after provisioning the MS SPRing nodes 8 NTP D341 Two Fiber MS SPRing Acceptance Test page 5 14 Complete this procedure after you create a two fiber MS SPRing 9 NTP D342 Fou...

Страница 132: ...o CTC task on page 17 49 If you are already logged in continue with Step 2 Step 2 Click the Alarms tab a Verify that the alarm filter is not on See the DLP D227 Disable Alarm Filtering task on page 19 25 as necessary b Verify that no unexplained alarms appear on the network If alarms appear investigate and resolve them before continuing Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide if nec...

Страница 133: ...ovisioned on the node click the Provisioning SNMP tabs Verify that all SNMP settings match the settings of your site plan If not see the NTP D87 Change SNMP Settings procedure on page 11 7 Step 10 Provision the network using the applicable procedure shown in the Before You Begin section on page 5 1 Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D124 Provision a Point to Point Network Step 1 Complete t...

Страница 134: ...7 83 Step 9 As needed complete the DLP D40 Create a Provisionable Patchcord task on page 17 31 Step 10 Verify that timing is set up at both point to point nodes If not complete the NTP D28 Set Up Timing procedure on page 4 9 for one or both of the nodes If a node uses line timing make its working STM N the timing source The system will automatically choose the corresponding protect STM N card as t...

Страница 135: ...on page 6 7 When you set the circuit state choose Unlocked and check the Apply to drop ports check box Step 7 Configure the test set for the test circuit type you created VC4 or VC4 nc If you are testing a VC4 circuit or a VC4 nc circuit on an STM N card you must have a direct optical interface to the ONS 15454 SDH Set the test set for STM N For information about configuring your test set consult ...

Страница 136: ...ror rate BER test Use the existing configuration and follow your site requirements for the specified length of time Record the test results and configuration Step 18 Remove any loopbacks switches or test sets from the nodes after all testing is complete Step 19 From the View menu choose Go to Network View Step 20 Click the Alarms tab a Verify that the alarm filter is not on See the DLP D227 Disabl...

Страница 137: ...y that the working and protect cards in the 1 1 protection groups correspond to the physical fiber connections between the nodes that is working cards are fibered to working cards and protect cards are fibered to protect cards Step 5 Complete the DLP D363 Provision Regenerator Section DCC Terminations task on page 20 68 for the working STM N ports on each linear ADM node Alternatively if additiona...

Страница 138: ...ogged in continue with Step 2 Step 2 From the View menu choose Go to Network View Step 3 Click the Alarms tab a Verify that the alarm filter is not on See the DLP D227 Disable Alarm Filtering task on page 19 25 as necessary b Verify that no unexplained alarms appear on the network If unexplained alarms appear resolve them before continuing Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide if ...

Страница 139: ...formation about configuring your test set consult your test set user guide VC11 If you are testing a VC11 circuit on an STM N or MRC 12 card you must have a direct optical interface to the ONS 15454 SDH Set the test set for STM N For information about configuring your test set consult your test set user guide Step 8 Verify the integrity of all patch cables that will be used in this test by connect...

Страница 140: ...ying correct setup and configuration If the test fails again refer to the next level of support After all tests are successfully completed and no alarms exist in the network the network is ready for service application Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D40 Provision MS SPRing Nodes Step 1 Complete the DLP D338 Install Fiber Optic Cables for MS SPRing Configurations task on page 20 37 veri...

Страница 141: ...same east port to west port connection is used for the working and protect fibers similar to Figure 5 3 Verify that the working and protect card connections are not mixed The working cards are the cards where you will provision the DCC terminations 55297 Node 1 West East West East West East West East Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 4 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 2 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Nod...

Страница 142: ...locked enabled STM N ports Step 4 For four fiber MS SPRings complete the DLP D214 Change the Service State for a Port task on page 19 10 to put the protect STM N cards ports in the Unlocked enabled service state Step 5 Repeat Steps 2 through 4 at each node that will be in the MS SPRing Verify that the EOC DCC Termination Failure and LOS Loss of Signal are cleared after DCCs are provisioned on all ...

Страница 143: ...sing the CTC MS SPRing wizard The MS SPRing wizard checks to see that each node is ready for MS SPRing provisioning then provisions all the nodes at once Using the MS SPRing wizard is recommended DLP D469 Create a Two Fiber MS SPRing Manually page 21 46 Use this task to provision a two fiber MS SPRing manually at each node that will be in the MS SPRing DLP D28 Create a Four Fiber MS SPRing Manuall...

Страница 144: ...pear on the network If unexplained conditions appear resolve them before continuing Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide if necessary b Complete the DLP D147 Export CTC Data task on page 18 38 to export the conditions information Step 5 On the network map double click Node 1 Step 6 Complete the DLP D217 MS SPRing Exercise Ring Test task on page 19 15 Step 7 Create a test circuit ...

Страница 145: ...ical loopback at the circuit destination card attach one end of a patch cable to the destination port s transmit Tx connector attach the other end to the port s receive Rx connector Step 11 At the circuit source card a Connect the transmit Tx connector of the test set to the circuit receive Rx connector b Connect the test set receive Rx connector to the circuit transmit Tx connector Step 12 Verify...

Страница 146: ...pear on the network If unexplained alarms appear resolve them before continuing Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide if necessary c Complete the DLP D147 Export CTC Data task on page 18 38 to export alarm information Step 4 Click the Conditions tab a Verify that no unexplained conditions appear on the network If unexplained conditions appear resolve them before continuing Refer t...

Страница 147: ...t user guide Step 10 Verify the integrity of all patch cables that will be used in this test by connecting one end of the cable to the test set transmit Tx connector and the other end of the cable to the test set receive Rx connector If the test set does not run error free check the cable for damage and check the test set to make sure it is set up correctly before continuing Step 11 Create a physi...

Страница 148: ...fer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide if necessary b Complete the DLP D147 Export CTC Data task on page 18 38 to export conditions information Step 25 If a node fails any test repeat the test while verifying correct setup and configuration If the test fails again refer to the next level of support After all tests are successfully completed and no alarms exist in the network the netw...

Страница 149: ... SPRing procedure on page 5 13 to create the MS SPRings c Complete the NTP D341 Two Fiber MS SPRing Acceptance Test procedure on page 5 14 to test two fiber MS SPRings d Complete the NTP D342 Four Fiber MS SPRing Acceptance Test procedure on page 5 16 to test four fiber MS SPRings Step 3 Verify that the MS SPRing DRI interconnect nodes have STM N cards installed and have fiber connections to the o...

Страница 150: ...e completed this procedure Node 1 West East West East West East West West West West West East East East East East Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 4 Slot 1 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 2 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 3 Slot 1 Tx Rx Slot 5 Tx Rx 115256 Node 5 Slot 1 Tx Rx Slot 5 Tx Rx Node 8 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 6 Slot 1 Tx Rx Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx...

Страница 151: ...n page 5 13 to create the MS SPRings c Complete the NTP D341 Two Fiber MS SPRing Acceptance Test procedure on page 5 14 to test two fiber MS SPRings d Complete the NTP D342 Four Fiber MS SPRing Acceptance Test procedure on page 5 16 to test four fiber MS SPRings Step 3 Verify that the MS SPRing DRI interconnect node has STM N cards installed and has fiber connections to the other interconnect node...

Страница 152: ...15454 SDH SNCPs do not require explicit set up Node 1 West East West West West East East East Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 3 Slot 2 West Tx Rx Slot 1 West Tx Rx Slot 12 East Tx Rx Node 2 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 4 Slot 1 West Tx Rx Slot 2 West Tx Rx 115257 Node 5 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Slot 5 East Tx Rx Slot 5 East Tx Rx Slot 12 East Tx Rx Node 6 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Purpose Th...

Страница 153: ...dwidth is needed for CTC management complete the DLP D364 Provision Multiplex Section DCC Terminations task on page 20 71 Note If an ONS 15454 SDH is not connected to a corporate LAN DCC or multiplex section DCC MS DCC provisioning must be performed through a direct craft connection Remote provisioning is possible only after all nodes in the network have DCC or MS DCC terminations provisioned to U...

Страница 154: ...acent SNCP node For VC4 circuits complete the NTP D323 Create an Automatically Routed High Order Circuit procedure on page 6 55 When you set the circuit state choose Unlocked and check the Apply to drop ports check box For VC3 circuits complete the NTP D54 Create an Automatically Routed Low Order VC3 Circuit procedure on page 6 31 When you set the circuit state choose Unlocked and check the Apply ...

Страница 155: ... b Connect the test set receive Rx connector to the circuit transmit Tx connector Step 11 Verify that the test set shows a clean signal If a clean signal does not appear repeat Steps 1 through 6 to make sure the test set and cabling are configured correctly Step 12 Inject BIT errors from the test set To verify that you have a complete end to end circuit verify that the errors appear at the test se...

Страница 156: ...ck the Dual Ring Interconnect check box during circuit creation Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 If you are already logged in continue with Step 2 Step 2 Complete the following steps if you have not provisioned the SNCPs that you will interconnect in an SNCP DRI If the SNCPs are created continue with Step 3 a Complete the NTP D44 Provision SNCP Nodes procedure on page 5 ...

Страница 157: ...13 at Node 4 and connected to an STM N in Slot 6 at Node 6 Nodes 3 and 5 are interconnected with STM N cards in Slot 6 Node 3 and Slot 13 Node 5 Figure 5 7 SNCP DRI Fiber Connection Example Stop You have completed this procedure Node 1 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 3 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 2 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 4 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx 83499 Node 5 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 T...

Страница 158: ...ll SNCPs that will be interconnected must be at the same STM N rate Step 3 Verify that the SNCP DRI interconnect nodes have STM N cards installed and have fiber connections to the other interconnect node The STM N cards that will connect the SNCPs must be installed at the interconnect nodes The STM N cards in the SNCP nodes and the interconnect nodes must be the same type The interconnect nodes mu...

Страница 159: ...rated SNCP Dual Ring Interconnect Figure 5 8 Integrated SNCP DRI Example Stop You have completed this procedure Node 1 Node 3 Node 2 Node 4 Slot 5 Slot 12 Tx Rx Slot 5 Slot 12 Tx Rx Slot 6 Slot 13 Slot 5 Slot 12 Tx Rx Slot 5 Slot 12 Tx Rx Slot 6 Slot 13 Node 5 Node 6 Slot 5 Slot 12 Tx Rx Slot 5 Slot 12 Tx Rx 83500 ...

Страница 160: ...P D341 Two Fiber MS SPRing Acceptance Test page 5 14 NTP D342 Four Fiber MS SPRing Acceptance Test page 5 16 b To provision and test the SNCP complete the following procedures NTP D44 Provision SNCP Nodes page 5 22 NTP D343 SNCP Acceptance Test page 5 24 Step 3 Verify that the DRI interconnect nodes have STM N cards installed and have fiber connections to the other interconnect node The STM N card...

Страница 161: ...ted this procedure Node 1 West East West East West East West West West West West East East MS SPRing SNCP Ring East East East Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 4 Slot 1 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 2 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 3 Slot 1 Tx Rx Slot 5 Tx Rx 115740 Node 5 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 6 Tx Rx Node 8 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 6 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Slot 6 Tx R...

Страница 162: ...341 Two Fiber MS SPRing Acceptance Test page 5 14 NTP D342 Four Fiber MS SPRing Acceptance Test page 5 16 b To provision and test the SNCP complete the following NTP D44 Provision SNCP Nodes page 5 22 NTP D343 SNCP Acceptance Test page 5 24 Step 3 Verify that the MS SPRing and SNCP DRI interconnect nodes have STM N cards installed and have fiber connections to the other interconnect node The STM N...

Страница 163: ...0 Integrated MS SPRing to SNCP DRI Example Stop You have completed this procedure Node 1 West West East West East East West East MS SPRing SNCP Ring Node 4 Node 2 Node 3 Slot 5 Slot 12 Tx Rx Slot 2 Slot 1 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Slot 5 Slot 12 Tx Rx Slot 1 Tx Rx Slot 2 Slot 5 Slot 12 Node 1 Node 2 Slot 5 Slot 12 Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Slot 5 Slot 12 Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx 115742 ...

Страница 164: ...H Nodes 2 and 3 through Slots 12 and 5 Trunk cards at Nodes 2 and 3 are connected to the third party vendor equipment Purpose This procedure provisions ONS 15454 SDH nodes in an open ended SNCP connected to a third party vendor network This topology allows you to route a circuit from one ONS 15454 SDH network to another ONS 15454 SDH network through a third party network Tools Equipment None Prere...

Страница 165: ... on page 17 49 If you are already logged in continue with Step 4 Step 4 Complete the DLP D363 Provision Regenerator Section DCC Terminations task on page 20 68 for the ONS 15454 SDH cards ports that are connected to another ONS 15454 SDH Alternatively if additional bandwidth is needed for CTC management complete the DLP D364 Provision Multiplex Section DCC Terminations task on page 20 71 Do not cr...

Страница 166: ...tance Test Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 at the node that will be the source node for traffic traversing the third party network If you are already logged in continue with Step 2 Step 2 From the View menu choose Go to Network View Step 3 Click the Alarms tab a Verify that the alarm filter is not on See the DLP D227 Disable Alarm Filtering task on page 19 25 as necessa...

Страница 167: ...nating node on the other side of the third party network In Figure 5 11 this is Node 6 However this circuit will have two sources one at Node 4 Slot 12 and one at Node 5 Slot 5 The destination will be a drop card on Node 6 Step 9 Configure the test set for the test circuit type you created VC4 or VC4 nc If you are testing a VC4 circuit or a VC4 nc circuit on an STM N card you must have a direct op...

Страница 168: ...7 Delete Circuits task on page 17 21 for the test circuit Step 23 Remove any loopbacks switches or test sets from the nodes after all testing is complete Step 24 In network view click the Alarms tab a Verify that the alarm filter is not on See the DLP D227 Disable Alarm Filtering task on page 19 25 as necessary b Verify that no unexplained alarms appear on the network If unexplained alarms appear ...

Страница 169: ...54 SDH that will subtend the SNCP Node 3 in the example Step 4 Complete the DLP D363 Provision Regenerator Section DCC Terminations task on page 20 68 for each STM N card that will carry the SNCP Step 5 Log into the SNCP node that connects to the node in Step 3 Step 6 Complete the DLP D363 Provision Regenerator Section DCC Terminations task on page 20 68 for each STM N card that will carry the SNC...

Страница 170: ... into the ONS 15454 SDH that will subtend the MS SPRing the node in Step 1 See the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 If you are already logged in continue with Step 4 Step 4 Create the DCCs on both STM N trunk cards east and west that will carry the MS SPRing See the DLP D363 Provision Regenerator Section DCC Terminations task on page 20 68 Alternatively if additional bandwidth is needed for...

Страница 171: ... two MS SPRings shared by one ONS 15454 SDH Ring 1 runs on Nodes 1 2 3 and 4 Ring 2 runs on Nodes 4 5 6 and 7 and represents the subtending ring added by this procedure Two MS SPRings Ring 1 and Ring 2 are provisioned on Node 4 Ring 1 uses cards in Slots 5 and 12 and Ring 2 uses cards in Slots 6 and 13 Figure 5 13 MS SPRing Subtended from an MS SPRing Purpose This procedure subtends an MS SPRing f...

Страница 172: ...peat Step 4 for the second STM N trunk card that will carry the MS SPRing Step 6 Complete the NTP D40 Provision MS SPRing Nodes procedure on page 5 10 for each node that will be in the MS SPRing If you have already provisioned the MS SPRing perform this procedure for the subtending node only Step 7 If the subtending MS SPRing is not already created complete the NTP D41 Create the MS SPRing procedu...

Страница 173: ...each node you need to position Step 4 On the network view map right click and choose Save Node Position Step 5 Click Yes in the Save Node Position dialog box CTC opens a progress bar and saves the new node positions Note Retrieve Provisioning and Maintenance users can move nodes on the network map but only Superusers can save new network map configurations To restore the view to a previously saved...

Страница 174: ...5 44 Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide R7 0 78 17194 01 Chapter 5 Turn Up a Network NTP D172 Create a Logical Network Map ...

Страница 175: ... D335 Create a Manually Routed Low Order VC11 Circuit page 6 12 Complete as needed 4 NTP D336 Create a Unidirectional Low Order VC11 Circuit with Multiple Drops page 6 15 Complete as needed 5 NTP D81 Create an Automatically Routed Low Order VC12 Circuit page 6 19 Complete as needed 6 NTP D82 Create a Manually Routed Low Order VC12 Circuit page 6 24 Complete as needed 7 NTP D83 Create a Unidirectio...

Страница 176: ...ge 6 75 Complete as needed 24 NTP D142 Create an E Series Shared Packet Ring Ethernet Circuit page 6 77 Complete as needed 25 NTP D143 Create an E Series Hub and Spoke Ethernet Configuration page 6 80 Complete as needed 26 NTP D144 Create an E Series Single Card EtherSwitch Manual Cross Connect page 6 82 Complete as needed 27 NTP D145 Create an E Series Multicard EtherSwitch Manual Cross Connect p...

Страница 177: ...ct capacity only at the source and destination nodes One low order tunnel can carry three VC3s and each VC3 can contain a VC3 circuit span or 21 VC11 or VC12 circuit spans Low order aggregation point Low order aggregation points LAPs allow low order VC11 VC12 and VC3 circuits to be aggregated into a VC4 for handoff to non ONS 15454 SDH networks or equipment such as interoffice facilities IOFs swit...

Страница 178: ...L Series card 1 16 per port 3 per VC4 7 per TUG3 3 per TUG2 OC 192 STM64 1 64 per port 3 per VC4 7 per TUG3 3 per TUG2 MRC 12 12 1 4 or 161 per port 1 The number of VC4s depends on the SFP used as well as available backplane width and existing provisioned lines For additional details refer to the Optical Cards chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual 3 per VC4 7 per TUG3 3 per TUG2 FC_M...

Страница 179: ... appropriate for your network topology or refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for troubleshooting procedures Step 4 Verify DCC connectivity All nodes must be connected by green lines If lines are missing or gray in color do not continue See Chapter 5 Turn Up a Network and follow the network turn up procedure appropriate for your network topology Verify that all nodes have DCC co...

Страница 180: ...s are provisioned as specified If not see the NTP D30 Create Users and Assign Security procedure on page 4 4 to correct the information g If Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is used click the SNMP tab and verify the trap and destination information If the information is not correct see the NTP D87 Change SNMP Settings procedure on page 11 7 to correct the information h Click the Comm Channe...

Страница 181: ...Circuits Enter the number of VC 11 circuits that you want to create The default is 1 If you are creating multiple circuits with the same slot and consecutive port numbers you can use Auto ranged to create the circuits automatically Auto ranged This check box is automatically selected if you enter more than 1 in the Number of Circuits field Auto ranging creates identical same source and destination...

Страница 182: ...n the circuit Use Locked maintenance for circuit testing or to suppress circuit alarms temporarily Change the administrative state to Unlocked Unlocked automaticInService or Locked disabled when testing is complete See the DLP D230 Change a Circuit State task on page 19 26 For additional information about circuit service states refer to the Circuits and Tunnels chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH R...

Страница 183: ...ination task on page 18 73 Step 12 In the Circuit Routing Preferences area Figure 6 2 choose Route Automatically Two options are available choose either both or none based on your preferences Using Required Nodes Spans Check this check box if you want to specify nodes and spans to include or exclude in the CTC generated circuit route Including nodes and spans for a circuit ensures that those nodes...

Страница 184: ...g protection channels are not protected They are preempted during MS SPRing switches Step 14 If you selected Fully Protected Path in Step 13 and the circuit will be routed on an SNCP choose one of the following Nodal Diversity Required Ensures that the primary and alternate paths within SNCP ring portions of the complete circuit path are nodally diverse Nodal Diversity Desired Specifies that node ...

Страница 185: ... are creating with others onto an VC4 for transport outside the ONS 15454 network choose one of the following VC4 grooming node is source node VC11 grooming node is destination node Creates the LAP on the VC11 circuit source node This option is available only if the VC11 circuit originates on an STM N card VC4 grooming node is destination node VC11 grooming node is source node Creates the LAP on t...

Страница 186: ...he circuit source and destination ports before you create the circuit complete the DLP D314 Assign a Name to a Port task on page 20 7 If you want CTC to assign a name automatically based on circuit type node name and sequence number continue with Step 4 Step 4 From the View menu choose Go to Network View Step 5 Click the Circuits tab then click Create Step 6 In the Circuit Creation dialog box comp...

Страница 187: ...nance for circuit testing or to suppress circuit alarms temporarily Change the administrative state to Unlocked Unlocked automaticInService or Locked disabled when testing is complete See the DLP D230 Change a Circuit State task on page 19 26 For additional information about circuit service states refer to the Circuits and Tunnels chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Apply to drop p...

Страница 188: ...rotected Path in Step 13 and the circuit will be routed on an SNCP DRI click the Dual Ring Interconnect check box Step 16 Click Next In the VC LO Matrix Optimization page choose one of the following Create VC LO tunnel on transit nodes This option is available if the VC11 circuit passes through a node that does not have a low order tunnel or if an existing low order tunnel is full Low order tunnel...

Страница 189: ...tep if you built a test circuit Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D336 Create a Unidirectional Low Order VC11 Circuit with Multiple Drops Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 at an ONS 15454 SDH on the network where you will create the circuit If you are already logged in continue with Step 2 Step 2 Complete the following a On the shelf graphic verify that XC VXC 10...

Страница 190: ...ice state automatically changes to Unlocked enabled Locked maintenance Puts the circuit cross connects in the Locked enabled maintenance service state The maintenance state does not interrupt traffic flow it suppresses alarms and conditions and allows loopbacks to be performed on the circuit Use Locked maintenance for circuit testing or to suppress circuit alarms temporarily Change the administrat...

Страница 191: ... not possible CTC creates fiber diverse paths for the SNCP ring portion of the complete circuit path Link Diversity Only Specifies that only fiber diverse primary and alternate paths for SNCP ring portions of the complete circuit path are needed The paths might be node diverse but CTC does not check for node diversity Step 14 If you selected Fully Protected Path in Step 12 and the circuit will be ...

Страница 192: ... To rearrange a node icon select the node press Ctrl then drag and drop the icon to the new location Step 21 In the Edit Circuit dialog box click the Drops tab A list of existing drops appears Step 22 Click Create Step 23 In the Define New Drop dialog box create the new drop a Node Choose the target node for the circuit drop b Slot Choose the target card and slot c Port VC4 VC3 TUG3 TUG2 VC11 Choo...

Страница 193: ...its Enter the number of VC 12 circuits that you want to create The default is 1 If you are creating multiple circuits with the same slot and consecutive port numbers you can use Auto ranged to create the circuits automatically Auto ranged This check box is automatically selected if you enter more than 1 in the Number of Circuits field Auto ranging creates identical same source and destination sequ...

Страница 194: ...n the circuit Use Locked maintenance for circuit testing or to suppress circuit alarms temporarily Change the administrative state to Unlocked Unlocked automaticInService or Locked disabled when testing is complete See the DLP D230 Change a Circuit State task on page 19 26 For additional information about circuit service states refer to the Circuits and Tunnels chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH R...

Страница 195: ...nation task on page 17 93 Step 12 In the Circuit Routing Preferences area Figure 6 4 choose Route Automatically Two options are available choose either both or none based on your preferences Using Required Nodes Spans Check this check box if you want to specify nodes and spans to include or exclude in the CTC generated circuit route Including nodes and spans for a circuit ensures that those nodes ...

Страница 196: ...g protection channels are not protected They are preempted during MS SPRing switches Step 14 If you selected Fully Protected Path in Step 13 and the circuit will be routed on an SNCP choose one of the following Nodal Diversity Required Ensures that the primary and alternate paths within SNCP ring portions of the complete circuit path are nodally diverse Nodal Diversity Desired Specifies that node ...

Страница 197: ... are creating with others onto an VC4 for transport outside the ONS 15454 network choose one of the following VC4 grooming node is source node VC12 grooming node is destination node Creates the LAP on the VC12 circuit source node This option is available only if the VC12 circuit originates on an STM N card VC4 grooming node is destination node VC12 grooming node is source node Creates the LAP on t...

Страница 198: ...cuit source and destination ports before you create the circuit complete the DLP D314 Assign a Name to a Port task on page 20 7 If you want CTC to assign a name automatically based on circuit type node name and sequence number continue with Step 4 Step 4 From the View menu choose Go to Network View Step 5 Click the Circuits tab then click Create Step 6 In the Circuit Creation dialog box complete t...

Страница 199: ...o Unlocked Unlocked automaticInService or Locked disabled when testing is complete See the DLP D230 Change a Circuit State task on page 19 26 For additional information about circuit service states refer to the Circuits and Tunnels chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Apply to drop ports Select this check box if you want to apply the state chosen in the State field to the circuit so...

Страница 200: ...rotected Path in Step 13 and the circuit will be routed on an SNCP DRI click the Dual Ring Interconnect check box Step 16 Click Next In the VC LO Matrix Optimization page choose one of the following Create VC LO tunnel on transit nodes This option is available if the VC12 circuit passes through a node that does not have a low order tunnel or if an existing low order tunnel is full Low order tunnel...

Страница 201: ... if you built a test circuit Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D83 Create a Unidirectional Low Order VC12 Circuit with Multiple Drops Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 at an ONS 15454 SDH on the network where you will create the circuit If you are already logged in continue with Step 2 Step 2 Complete the following a On the shelf graphic verify that XC VXC 10G XC...

Страница 202: ...ce state automatically changes to Unlocked enabled Locked maintenance Puts the circuit cross connects in the Locked enabled maintenance service state The maintenance state does not interrupt traffic flow it suppresses alarms and conditions and allows loopbacks to be performed on the circuit Use Locked maintenance for circuit testing or to suppress circuit alarms temporarily Change the administrati...

Страница 203: ...not possible CTC creates fiber diverse paths for the SNCP ring portion of the complete circuit path Link Diversity Only Specifies that only fiber diverse primary and alternate paths for SNCP ring portions of the complete circuit path are needed The paths might be node diverse but CTC does not check for node diversity Step 14 If you selected Fully Protected Path in Step 12 and the circuit will be r...

Страница 204: ...o rearrange a node icon select the node press Ctrl then drag and drop the icon to the new location Step 21 In the Edit Circuit dialog box click the Drops tab A list of existing drops appears Step 22 Click Create Step 23 In the Define New Drop dialog box create the new drop a Node Choose the target node for the circuit drop b Slot Choose the target card and slot c Port VC4 VC3 TUG3 TUG2 VC12 Choose...

Страница 205: ... 6 5 on page 6 32 Name Assign a name to the circuit The name can be alphanumeric and up to 48 characters including spaces Circuit names should be 44 characters or less if you want the ability to create monitor circuits If you leave the field blank CTC assigns a default name to the circuit Auto ranged This check box is automatically selected if you enter more than 1 in the Number of Circuits field ...

Страница 206: ...o the Circuits and Tunnels chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Apply to drop ports Check this check box if you want to apply the state chosen in the State field to the circuit source and destination ports CTC applies the circuit state to the ports only if the circuit bandwidth is the same as the port bandwidth or if the port bandwidth is larger than the circuit the circuit must be ...

Страница 207: ...circuit on an MS SPRing protection channel if available uncheck Fully Protected Path check Protection Channel Access click Yes in the Warning dialog box and then continue with Step 16 Caution Circuits routed on MS SPRing protection channels are not protected They are preempted during MS SPRing switches Step 14 If you selected Fully Protected Path in Step 13 and the circuit will be routed on an SNC...

Страница 208: ...g node is source node Creates the LAP on the VC12 circuit destination node This option is available only if the VC3 circuit terminates on an STM N card None Choose this option if you do not want to create a low order tunnel or a LAP This is the only available option if CTC cannot create a low order tunnel or LAP Step 18 If you selected Review Route Before Creation in Step 12 complete the following...

Страница 209: ...reate The default is 1 If you are creating multiple circuits with the same slot and consecutive port numbers you can use Auto ranged to create the circuits automatically Auto ranged This check box is automatically selected if you enter more than 1 in the Number of Circuits field Auto ranging creates identical same source and destination sequential circuits automatically Uncheck the box if you do n...

Страница 210: ...the same as the port bandwidth or if the port bandwidth is larger than the circuit the circuit must be the first circuit to use the drop port If not a Warning dialog box shows the ports where the circuit state could not be applied If the box is unchecked CTC does not change the state of the source and destination ports Note If ports managed into the Unlocked administrative state are not receiving ...

Страница 211: ...int This option is available if you are creating a VC3 circuit to an STM N port for handoff to non ONS 15454 SDH networks or equipment such as an IOF switch or DACS A LAP allows low order circuits to be routed through a node using one VC4 connection on the cross connect card high order matrix rather than multiple connections on the low order matrix If you want to aggregate the low order circuit yo...

Страница 212: ... automatically based on circuit type node name and sequence number continue with Step 4 Step 4 From the View menu choose Go to Network View Step 5 Click the Circuits tab then click Create Step 6 In the Circuit Creation dialog box complete the following fields Circuit Type Choose VC_LO_PATH_CIRCUIT Number of Circuits Leave the default unchanged 1 Auto ranged Unavailable when the Number of Circuits ...

Страница 213: ...d conditions and allows loopbacks to be performed on the circuit Use Locked maintenance for circuit testing or to suppress circuit alarms temporarily Change the administrative state to Unlocked Unlocked automaticInService or Locked disabled when testing is complete See the DLP D230 Change a Circuit State task on page 19 26 For additional information about circuit service states refer to the Circui...

Страница 214: ...d Path and continue with Step 16 To route the circuit on an MS SPRing protection channel if available uncheck Fully Protected Path check Protection Channel Access click Yes in the Warning dialog box then continue with Step 16 Caution Circuits routed on MS SPRing protection channels are not protected and are preempted during MS SPRing switches Step 13 If you selected Fully Protected Path in Step 12...

Страница 215: ...is source node Creates the LAP on the VC3 circuit destination node This option is available only if the VC3 circuit terminates on an STM N card None Choose this option if you do not want to create a low order tunnel or a LAP This is the only available option if CTC cannot create a low order tunnel or LAP Step 16 Click Next In the Route Review and Edit area node icons appear so you can route the ci...

Страница 216: ...D133 Create an Automatically Routed Low Order Tunnel Note Low order tunnels allow low order VC12 and VC3 circuits to pass through intermediary ONS 15454 SDH nodes without consuming low order matrix resources on the cross connect card In general creating low order tunnels is a good idea if you are creating many low order circuits from the same source and destination Refer to the Circuits and Tunnel...

Страница 217: ...led disabled service state Traffic is not passed on the circuit Unlocked automaticInService Puts the circuit cross connects in the Unlocked disabled automaticInService service state and suppresses alarms and conditions When the connections receive a valid signal the service state automatically changes to Unlocked enabled Locked maintenance Puts the circuit cross connects in the Locked enabled main...

Страница 218: ...it but not the protect path Excluding nodes and spans ensures that the nodes and spans are not in the working or protect path of the circuit Review Route Before Creation Check this check box to review and edit the low order tunnel route before the circuit is created Step 14 If you selected Using Required Nodes Spans in Step 13 a Click Next b In the Circuit Route Constraints For Auto Routing area c...

Страница 219: ...ing many low order circuits from the same source and destination Refer to the Circuits and Tunnels chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual for more information Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 at an ONS 15454 SDH on the network where you will create the tunnel If you are already logged in continue with Step 2 Step 2 If you want to assign a name to the tunnel ...

Страница 220: ... performed on the circuit Use Locked maintenance for circuit testing or to suppress circuit alarms temporarily Change the administrative state to Unlocked Unlocked automaticInService or Locked disabled when testing is complete See the DLP D230 Change a Circuit State task on page 19 26 Note A low order tunnel automatically transitions into the Unlocked service state after a VC12 or VC3 circuit is c...

Страница 221: ...reate Step 5 In the Circuit Creation dialog box complete the following fields Circuit Type Choose VC_LO_PATH TUNNEL For VC3 Port Grouping Only Check this box Step 6 Click Next Step 7 Define the circuit attributes Name Assign a name to the low order tunnel The name can be alphanumeric and up to 48 characters including spaces Circuit names should be 44 characters or less if you want the ability to c...

Страница 222: ...created For additional information about circuit service states refer to the Circuits and Tunnels chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Apply to drop ports Uncheck this box Step 8 If the tunnel will be routed on an SNCP ring complete the DLP D218 Provision SNCP Ring Selectors During Circuit Creation task on page 19 17 Otherwise continue with Step 9 Step 9 Click Next Step 10 In the Ci...

Страница 223: ...ets the low order tunnel sequence Click spans twice to change the circuit direction d Repeat Step c for each node or span that you wish to include or exclude e Review the low order tunnel route To change the tunnel routing order choose a node from the Required Nodes Lines or Excluded Nodes Links lists then click the Up or Down buttons to change the tunnel routing order Click Remove to remove a nod...

Страница 224: ...Network View Step 4 Click the Circuits tab then click Create Step 5 In the Circuit Creation dialog box choose VC_LO_PATH_AGGREGATION Step 6 Click Next Step 7 Define the circuit attributes Figure 6 8 on page 6 51 Name Assign a name to the low order aggregation point The name can be alphanumeric and up to 48 characters including spaces Circuit names should be 44 characters or less if you want the ab...

Страница 225: ...P D230 Change a Circuit State task on page 19 26 Note A low order aggregation point automatically transitions into the Unlocked service state after a VC12 or VC3 circuit is created For additional information about circuit service states refer to the Circuits and Tunnels chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Apply to drop ports Uncheck this box Figure 6 8 Setting Attributes for a Low ...

Страница 226: ...t Route Constraints For Auto Routing area click a span on the LAP map c Click Include to include the node or span in the LAP Click Exclude to exclude the node or span from the LAP The sequence in which you choose the nodes and spans sets the LAP sequence Click spans twice to change the circuit direction d Repeat Step c for each node or span that you wish to include or exclude e Review the LAP rout...

Страница 227: ... to the port you are testing Connect the Tx connector to the Rx connector of the port Purpose This procedure tests low order VC11 VC12 and VC3 circuits Tools Equipment A test set and all appropriate cables Prerequisite Procedures This procedure assumes that you completed facility loopback tests on the fibers and cables from the source and destination ONS 15454 SDHs to the digital signal cross conn...

Страница 228: ... set user guide VC12 If you are testing an E1 you must have a patch panel or a direct E1 interface to the ONS 15454 SDH Set the test set for E1 For information about configuring your test set consult your test set user guide Step 8 Verify that the test set has a clean signal If a clean signal is not shown repeat Steps 4 through 7 to make sure the test set and cabling are configured correctly Step ...

Страница 229: ...8 or CE 1000 4 circuits complete the DLP D141 Provision CE 100T 8 and CE 1000 4 POS Ports task on page 18 33 To provision Ethernet ports for ML Series circuits complete the DLP D493 Provision the Ethernet Port of the ML Series Card task on page 21 49 To provision POS ports for ML Series circuits complete the DLP D494 Provision the POS Port of the ML Series Card task on page 21 50 Step 5 From the V...

Страница 230: ...ignal the service state automatically changes to Unlocked enabled Locked maintenance Puts the circuit cross connects in the Locked enabled maintenance service state The maintenance state does not interrupt traffic flow it suppresses alarms and conditions and allows loopbacks to be performed on the circuit Use Locked maintenance for circuit testing or to suppress circuit alarms temporarily Change t...

Страница 231: ... circuit Review Route Before Creation Check this check box to review and edit the circuit route before the circuit is created Step 14 Set the circuit path protection To route the circuit on a protected path leave Fully Protected Path checked and continue with Step 15 CTC creates a fully protected circuit route based on the path diversity option you choose Fully protected paths might or might not h...

Страница 232: ...matic Routing area click Add MS SPRing DRI b In the confirmation window click OK c In the Node Options area of the MS SPRing DRI Options dialog box complete the following Primary Node For a traditional or integrated MS SPRing DRI choose the node where the circuit interconnects the rings Secondary Node For a traditional or integrated MS SPRing DRI choose the secondary node for the circuit to interc...

Страница 233: ...dit window As necessary click Add MS SPRing DRI to add another DRI Click Remove to remove a DRI assignment Click the Included Spans tab to view the spans The map graphic updates as you apply changes Step 21 Click Finish One of the following occurs based on the circuit properties that you provisioned in the Circuit Creation dialog box If you entered more than 1 in the Number of Circuits field and s...

Страница 234: ...8 or CE 1000 4 circuits complete the DLP D141 Provision CE 100T 8 and CE 1000 4 POS Ports task on page 18 33 To provision Ethernet ports for ML Series circuits complete the DLP D493 Provision the Ethernet Port of the ML Series Card task on page 21 49 To provision POS ports for ML Series circuits complete the DLP D494 Provision the POS Port of the ML Series Card task on page 21 50 Step 5 From the V...

Страница 235: ...ked automaticInService or Locked disabled when testing is complete See the DLP D230 Change a Circuit State task on page 19 26 For additional information about circuit service states refer to the Circuits and Tunnels chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Apply to drop ports Check this box if you want to apply the state chosen in the State field to the circuit source and destination po...

Страница 236: ... SPRing DRI or SNCP DRI click the Dual Ring Interconnect check box Step 16 Click Next In the Route Review Edit area node icons appear for you to route the circuit manually If you checked Dual Ring Interconnect for MS SPRing continue with Step 17 If not continue with Step 18 Step 17 If you checked Dual Ring Interconnect in Step 13 for a MS SPRing DRI complete the following substeps to assign primar...

Страница 237: ...rk where you will create the circuit If you are already logged in continue with Step 2 Step 2 If you want to assign a name to the tunnel source and destination ports before you create the circuit complete the DLP D314 Assign a Name to a Port task on page 20 7 If you want CTC to assign a name automatically based on circuit type node name and sequence number continue with Step 3 Step 3 From the View...

Страница 238: ... or Locked disabled when testing is complete See the DLP D230 Change a Circuit State task on page 19 26 For additional information about circuit service states refer to the Circuits and Tunnels chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Apply to drop ports Check this box if you want to apply the state chosen in the State field to the circuit source and destination ports CTC applies the ci...

Страница 239: ...uit path are needed The paths might be node diverse but CTC does not check for node diversity Note For manually routed circuits CTC checks your manually provisioned path against the path diversity option you choose If the path does not meet the path diversity requirement that is specified an error message appears Step 14 If you selected Fully Protected Path in Step 12 and the circuit will be route...

Страница 240: ...ey do not appear repeat Steps 21 through 24 making sure that all options are provisioned correctly Step 26 Complete the NTP D62 Test High Order Circuits procedure on page 6 66 Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D62 Test High Order Circuits Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 at an ONS 15454 SDH on the network where you will test the high order circuits If you are al...

Страница 241: ...et user guide STM 16 cards You will test either a VC4 16c or a multiplexed VC4 16 If you are testing a VC4 16c configure the test set for a VC4 16c If you are testing a multiplexed VC4 16 configure the test set for a multiplexed VC4 16 and choose the E3 DS3i N 12 or E1 you will test For information about configuring your test set consult your test set user guide STM 64 cards You will test a VC4 64...

Страница 242: ...t is 1 Auto ranged This check box is automatically selected if you enter more than 1 in the Number of Circuits field Uncheck the box Step 6 Click Next Step 7 Define the circuit attributes Name Assign a name to the circuit The name can be alphanumeric and up to 48 characters including spaces Circuit names should be 44 characters or less if you want the ability to create monitor circuits If you leav...

Страница 243: ...dth is larger than the circuit the circuit must be the first circuit to use the drop port If not a Warning dialog box shows the ports where the circuit state could not be applied If the box is unchecked CTC does not change the state of the source and destination ports Note If ports managed into the Unlocked administrative state are not receiving signals loss of signal alarms are generated and the ...

Страница 244: ...the circuit The name can be alphanumeric and up to 48 characters including spaces Circuit names should be 44 characters or less if you want the ability to create monitor circuits If you leave the field blank CTC assigns a default name to the circuit Size For high order circuits choose VC4 For low order circuits choose VC11 VC12 or VC3 Bidirectional Leave checked for this circuit default Create cro...

Страница 245: ...st circuit to use the drop port If not a Warning dialog box shows the ports where the circuit state could not be applied If the box is unchecked CTC does not change the state of the source and destination ports Note If ports managed into the Unlocked administrative state are not receiving signals loss of signal alarms are generated and the port service state transitions to Unlocked disabled failed...

Страница 246: ...P D246 Provision E Series Ethernet Card Mode task on page 19 50 Step 6 From the View menu choose Go to Network View Step 7 Click the Circuits tab then click Create Step 8 In the Circuit Creation dialog box complete the following fields Circuit Type Choose VC_HO_PATH_CIRCUIT Number of Circuits Leave the default unchanged 1 Auto ranged Unavailable Step 9 Click Next Step 10 Define the circuit attribu...

Страница 247: ...ch circuit endpoint nodes Either end node can be the EtherSwitch circuit source b From the Slot drop down list choose one of the following If you are building a multicard EtherSwitch circuit choose Ethergroup If you are building a single card EtherSwitch circuit choose the Ethernet card where you enabled the single card EtherSwitch Step 14 Click Next Step 15 Provision the circuit destination a Fro...

Страница 248: ...ules prevent users from creating new circuits or modifying existing circuits if the circuits do not meet certain VLAN assignment constraints If the VLAN set of the new circuit overlaps with existing circuits the same spanning tree instance is used for all circuits If the VLAN set of the new circuit overlaps with VLAN sets of existing circuits with different spanning tree instances the VLAN assignm...

Страница 249: ...eation dialog box complete the following fields Circuit Type Choose VC_HO_PATH_CIRCUIT Number of Circuits Leave the default 1 unchanged Step 8 Click Next Step 9 Define the circuit attributes Name Assign a name to the circuit The name can be alphanumeric and up to 48 characters including spaces Circuit names should be 44 characters or less if you want the ability to create monitor circuits If you l...

Страница 250: ...the state chosen in the State field Unlocked or Locked maintenance only to the Ethernet circuit source and destination ports You cannot apply Unlocked automaticInService to E Series Ethernet card ports CTC applies the circuit state to the ports only if the circuit bandwidth is the same as the port bandwidth or if the port bandwidth is larger than the circuit the circuit must be the first circuit t...

Страница 251: ...on circuit type node name and sequence number continue with Step 3 Step 3 If a high number of VLANs is already used by the system complete the DLP D99 Determine Available VLANs task on page 17 98 to verify that sufficient VLAN capacity is available You will create a VLAN during each circuit creation task Step 4 Verify that the Ethernet cards that will carry the circuit are provisioned for Multicar...

Страница 252: ...e circuit will be routed on an SNCP ring complete the DLP D218 Provision SNCP Ring Selectors During Circuit Creation task on page 19 17 Caution Layer 1 SDH protection does not extend to multicard EtherSwitch circuits on SNCP rings Step 12 Click Next Step 13 Provision the circuit source a From the Node drop down list choose one of the shared packet ring circuit endpoint nodes Either end node can be...

Страница 253: ...ns white Step 22 Click Add Span The span turns blue CTC adds the span to the Included Spans list Step 23 Click the node at the end of the blue span Step 24 Click the green span attached to the node you clicked in Step 23 The span turns white Step 25 Click Add Span The span turns blue Step 26 Repeat Steps 23 through 25 for every node in the ring Step 27 Verify that the new circuit is correctly conf...

Страница 254: ... the hub node is provisioned for single card EtherSwitch once Step 7 Click the Circuits tab and click Create Step 8 In the Circuit Creation dialog box complete the following fields Circuit Type Choose VC_HO_PATH_CIRCUIT Number of Circuits Leave the default 1 unchanged Auto ranged Unavailable Step 9 Click Next Step 10 Define the circuit attributes Name Assign a name to the circuit The name can be a...

Страница 255: ...xt Step 17 Review the VLANs in the Available VLANs list If the VLAN you want to use appears continue with Step 19 If you need to create a new VLAN complete the following steps a Click the New VLAN button b In the New VLAN dialog box complete the following VLAN Name Assign an easily identifiable name to your VLAN VLAN ID Assign a VLAN ID The VLAN ID should be the next available number between 2 and...

Страница 256: ...rs to a circuit connection created within the same node between the Ethernet card and an STM N card that is connected to third party equipment You create cross connects at the source and destination nodes so that an Ethernet circuit can be routed from source to destination across third party equipment Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 at an ONS 15454 SDH on the network wh...

Страница 257: ...ss connects only TL1 like Check this check box if you want to create one or more cross connects to complete a signal path for TL1 generated circuits If you check this box low order tunnels and Ethergroup sources and destinations are unavailable State Choose the administrative state to apply to all of the cross connects in a circuit Unlocked Puts the circuit cross connects in the Unlocked enabled s...

Страница 258: ... button b In the New VLAN dialog box complete the following VLAN Name Assign an easily identifiable name to your VLAN VLAN ID Assign a VLAN ID The VLAN ID should be the next available number between 2 and 4093 that is not already assigned to an existing VLAN Each ONS 15454 SDH network supports a maximum of 509 user provisionable VLANs Topology Host Choose the topology host ID from the drop down li...

Страница 259: ...f you want CTC to assign a name automatically based on circuit type node name and sequence number continue with Step 3 Step 3 Complete the DLP D99 Determine Available VLANs task on page 17 98 to verify that sufficient VLAN capacity is available You will create a VLAN during each circuit creation task Step 4 Verify that the Ethernet card that will carry the circuit is provisioned for Multicard Ethe...

Страница 260: ...connections receive a valid signal the service state automatically changes to Unlocked enabled Locked maintenance Puts the circuit cross connects in the Locked enabled maintenance service state The maintenance state does not interrupt traffic flow it suppresses alarms and conditions and allows loopbacks to be performed on the circuit Use Locked maintenance for circuit testing or to suppress circui...

Страница 261: ...erify the cross connect information in this step circuit refers to the Ethernet cross connect Circuit name Circuit type Circuit size VLANs ONS 15454 SDH nodes If the information is not correct click the Back button and repeat the procedure with the correct information If the information is correct check Route Automatically Step 21 Click Finish Step 22 Complete the DLP D220 Provision E Series Ether...

Страница 262: ...riate circuit must exist in the non ONS equipment to connect the two Ethernet manual cross connect endpoints Caution If a CARLOSS alarm repeatedly appears and clears on an Ethernet manual cross connect the two Ethernet circuits might have a circuit size mismatch for example if a circuit size of VC4 was configured on the first ONS 15454 SDH and a circuit size of VC4 2c was configured on the second ...

Страница 263: ...on card Step 7 At the destination node connect an Ethernet test set to the destination port and configure the test set to send and receive the appropriate Ethernet traffic Purpose This procedure tests circuits created on E Series Ethernet cards that are provisioned for multicard EtherSwitch single card EtherSwitch or port mapped mode Tools Equipment Ethernet test set and appropriate fibers Prerequ...

Страница 264: ...You have completed this procedure NTP D148 Create a Manual Cross Connect for a G Series or E Series Card in Port Mapped Mode Note In this procedure cross connect refers to a circuit connection created within the same node between the Ethernet card and an STM N card connected to third party equipment You create cross connects at the source and destination nodes so an Ethernet circuit can be routed ...

Страница 265: ...nels and Ethergroup sources and destinations are unavailable State Choose the administrative state to apply to all of the cross connects in a circuit Unlocked Puts the circuit cross connects in the Unlocked enabled service state Locked disabled Puts the circuit cross connects in the Locked enabled disabled service state Traffic is not passed on the circuit Unlocked automaticInService Puts the circ...

Страница 266: ...If the information is not correct click the Back button and repeat the procedure with the correct information If the information is correct check Route Automatically Step 16 Complete the NTP D149 Test G Series Circuits procedure on page 6 95 for a G Series card or complete the NTP D146 Test E Series Circuits procedure on page 6 89 for an E Series card Step 17 Click Finish Stop You have completed t...

Страница 267: ...st d Click a Port B row for example Port 2 e In the TXP Port column choose Port A for example Port 1 from the drop down list f In the TXP Mode column choose TX RX from the drop down list g Click Apply The ports in card view have arrows and a connecting line between the back of the ports Figure 6 10 Two Port Bidirectional Transponder Mode Step 5 To put a G Series card port in one port bidirectional...

Страница 268: ...ir any two ports on a G Series card in two port unidirectional mode a Click the Port A row for example Port 1 b Uncheck Auto Negotiation Ports cannot be provisioned in unidirectional transponder mode when autonegotiation is enabled c In the TXP Port column choose Port B for example Port 2 from the drop down list d In the TXP Mode column choose RX Only from the drop down list CTC completes the Port...

Страница 269: ...ocked enabled maintenance service state Purpose This procedure tests circuits created on G Series Ethernet cards Tools Equipment Ethernet test set and appropriate fibers Prerequisite Procedures This procedure assumes that you completed facility loopback tests to test the fibers and cables from the source and destination ONS 15454 SDHs to the fiber distribution panel or the DSX and one of the follo...

Страница 270: ...ween the nodes repeat Steps 1 through 8 to make sure that you configured the Ethernet ports and test set correctly Step 10 Perform protection switch testing appropriate to the SDH topology For SNCP rings complete the DLP D94 SNCP Protection Switching Test task on page 17 91 For MS SPRings complete the DLP D91 MS SPRing Switch Test task on page 17 84 Configure your test set according to local site ...

Страница 271: ...ts for CE 100T 8 circuits complete the DLP D136 Provision CE 100T 8 Ethernet Ports task on page 18 30 To provision Ethernet ports for CE 1000 4 circuits complete the DLP D211 Provision CE 1000 4 Ethernet Ports task on page 19 8 To provision POS ports for CE 100T 8 or CE 1000 4 circuits complete the DLP D141 Provision CE 100T 8 and CE 1000 4 POS Ports task on page 18 33 To provision Ethernet ports ...

Страница 272: ...te could not be applied If the check box is unchecked CTC does not change the service state of the source and destination ports Symmetric Checked is the default You cannot change it Member size Choose the member size For information about the member size supported for each card refer to the Circuits and Tunnels chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Num of members Choose the number of...

Страница 273: ...atically Two options are available choose either both or none based on your preferences Using Required Nodes Spans Check this check box to specify nodes and spans to include or exclude in the CTC generated circuit route Including nodes and spans for a circuit ensures that those nodes and spans are in the working path of the circuit but not the protect path Excluding nodes and spans ensures that th...

Страница 274: ...ou want to route from the Route member number drop down list b Click a node or span on the circuit map c Click Include to include the node or span in the circuit or click Exclude to exclude the node or span from the circuit The order in which you choose included nodes and spans is the order in which the circuit is routed Click spans twice to change the circuit direction d Repeat Steps b and c for ...

Страница 275: ...thernet ports for CE 100T 8 circuits complete the DLP D136 Provision CE 100T 8 Ethernet Ports task on page 18 30 To provision Ethernet ports for CE 1000 4 circuits complete the DLP D211 Provision CE 1000 4 Ethernet Ports task on page 19 8 To provision POS ports for CE 100T 8 or CE 1000 4 circuits complete the DLP D141 Provision CE 100T 8 and CE 1000 4 POS Ports task on page 18 33 To provision Ethe...

Страница 276: ...m of members Choose the number of members For information about the number of members supported for each card refer to the Circuits and Tunnels chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Mode Choose the protection mode for the VCAT circuit None Provides no protection A failure on one member causes the entire VCAT circuit to fail You cannot delete members after creating a VCAT circuit with...

Страница 277: ... Circuits window appears Verify that the circuit you created appears in the window Step 18 Complete the NTP D62 Test High Order Circuits procedure on page 6 66 Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D325 Create an STM Test Circuit around the Ring Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 at an ONS 15454 SDH on the network where you will create the circuit If you are already l...

Страница 278: ...nService service state and suppresses alarms and conditions When the connections receive a valid signal the service state automatically changes to Unlocked enabled Locked maintenance Puts the circuit cross connects in the Locked enabled maintenance service state The maintenance state does not interrupt traffic flow it suppresses alarms and conditions and allows loopbacks to be performed on the cir...

Страница 279: ...ose the destination port and or VC 4 from the Port and VC 4 drop down lists The Port drop down list is available only if the card has multiple ports The VC 4s that appear depend on the card circuit size and protection scheme Step 11 Click Next Step 12 In the Circuit Routing Preferences area uncheck Route Automatically Step 13 When routing a test circuit with source and destination ports on the sam...

Страница 280: ...determines the protection type for any circuits that traverse it Number of Trails Enter the number of server trails You can create multiple server trails from the same port The maximum number is determined by how many circuits of a particular server trail size can be supported on the port SRLG Enter a value for the Shared Resource Link Group SRLG SRLG is used by Cisco Transport Manager CTM to spec...

Страница 281: ...e the source VC11 Step 8 Click Next Step 9 In the Destination area complete the following a From the Node drop down list choose the node where the source will terminate b From the Slot drop down list choose the slot c From the Port drop down list choose the port d As applicable choose the following From the VC4 drop down list choose the source VC4 From the TUG3 drop down list choose the source TUG...

Страница 282: ...6 108 Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide R7 0 78 17194 01 Chapter 6 Create Circuits and Low Order Tunnels NTP D350 Create a Server Trail ...

Страница 283: ...time and payload defect indication path PDI P settings for subnetwork connection protection SNCP ring circuits delete a circuit or add or delete a VCAT member 4 NTP D288 Modify and Delete Overhead Circuits and Server Trails page 7 4 Complete as needed to change a tunnel type repair an IP circuit or delete an overhead circuit 5 NTP D78 Create a Monitor Circuit page 7 5 Complete as needed to monitor...

Страница 284: ...47 Export CTC Data task on page 18 38 Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D200 View Cross Connect Card Resource Usage Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 at the node where you want to view the cross connect card resource usage If you are already logged in continue with Step 2 Step 2 Click the Maintenance Cross Connect Resource Usage tabs Purpose This procedure allows...

Страница 285: ... card only Provides the percent of VC11 matrix ports that are in use VC11 matrix ports are the number of TUG3s used to support TUG2s that is VC11s and VC12s 96 VC11 matrix ports are available VC11 Matrix XC VXC 10G card only Provides the percent of VC11 matrix resources that are in use 2016 VC11 paths are available Step 4 In the TUG3 Matrix Port Detail section click VC11 VC12 VC3 or Unused to view...

Страница 286: ...T Member Service State task on page 17 72 Step 9 As needed complete the DLP D76 Add a Member to a VCAT Circuit task on page 17 67 Step 10 As needed complete the DLP D77 Delete a Member from a VCAT Circuit task on page 17 69 Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D288 Modify and Delete Overhead Circuits and Server Trails Caution Deleting circuits can be service affecting and should be performed...

Страница 287: ... the Circuits tab Step 4 Choose the bidirectional 2 way circuit that you want to monitor and double click it or click Edit Step 5 Verify that the circuit name is no longer than 44 characters Monitor circuits append a _MON to the circuit name If the name is longer than 44 characters edit the name in the Name field then click Apply Step 6 In the Edit Circuit window click the Monitors tab The Monitor...

Страница 288: ...monitor circuit in Figure 7 1 is used to monitor VC4 traffic received by Port 1 of the STM 1 card Figure 7 1 VC4 Monitor Circuit Received at an STM 1 Port Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D329 Create a J0 Section Trace Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 at a node on the network where you will create the section trace If you are already logged in continue with Ste...

Страница 289: ...o Manual enter the string that the destination port should receive from the source port in the New Expected String field If you set Section Trace Mode to Auto skip this step Step 8 Click the Disable AIS and RDI if TIM P is detected check box if you want to suppress the alarm indication signal AIS and remote defect indication RDI when the STS Section Trace Identifier Mismatch Path TIM P alarm appea...

Страница 290: ...Complete the following tasks as needed As needed complete the DLP D264 Provision a J1 Path Trace on Circuit Source and Destination Ports task on page 19 68 As needed complete the DLP D137 Provision a J1 Path Trace on STM N Ports task on page 18 31 As needed complete the DLP D367 Provision a J2 Path Trace on Circuit Source and Destination Ports task on page 20 72 Stop You have completed this proced...

Страница 291: ...rcuit task on page 19 41 Step 6 As needed complete the DLP D240 Cancel a Roll task on page 19 43 Purpose This procedure reroutes live traffic without interrupting service You can use the Bridge and Roll wizard for maintenance functions such as card replacement or load balancing A circuit consists of a source facility one or more destination facilities and intermediate facilities path Tools Equipme...

Страница 292: ...are already logged in continue with Step 2 Step 2 From the View menu choose Go to Network View Step 3 Click the Circuits tab Step 4 Choose the circuits that you want to reconfigure Step 5 From the Tools menu choose Circuits Reconfigure Circuits Step 6 In the confirmation dialog box click Yes to continue Step 7 In the notification box view the reconfiguration result Click Ok Stop You have completed...

Страница 293: ...LP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 If you are already logged in continue with Step 2 Step 2 From the Tools menu choose Manage VLANs The All VLANS dialog box appears listing all of the VLAN topologies in the network Step 3 Complete the following as necessary To add a VLAN complete the DLP D243 Create a VLAN task on page 19 46 Purpose This procedure merges two circuits that create a single conti...

Страница 294: ...sco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide R7 0 78 17194 01 Chapter 7 Manage Circuits NTP D352 Manage VLANs To delete a VLAN complete the DLP D248 Delete VLANs task on page 19 52 Stop You have completed this procedure ...

Страница 295: ...n to a procedure for applicable tasks DLPs 1 NTP D257 Change the PM Display page 8 2 Complete as needed to change the displayed PM counts 2 NTP D195 Monitor Electrical Performance page 8 3 Complete as needed to monitor electrical performance 3 NTP D198 Monitor Ethernet Performance page 8 4 Complete as needed to monitor Ethernet performance 4 NTP D289 Create and Delete Ethernet RMON Thresholds page...

Страница 296: ... Near End PM Counts page 18 24 DLP D127 View Far End PM Counts page 18 25 DLP D458 Monitor PM Counts for a Selected Signal page 21 34 DLP D129 Reset Current PM Counts page 18 25 DLP D459 Clear Selected PM Counts page 21 36 DLP D457 Refresh E Series and G Series Ethernet PM Counts page 21 33 DLP D260 Set Auto Refresh Interval for Displayed PM Counts page 19 64 DLP D261 Refresh PM Counts for a Diffe...

Страница 297: ...se This procedure enables you to view node near end or far end performance during selected time intervals on an electrical card and port to detect possible performance problems Tools Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures Before you monitor performance be sure you have created the appropriate circuits and provisioned the card according to your specifications For more information see Chapter 6 Crea...

Страница 298: ...the DLP D258 View Ethernet History PM Parameters task on page 19 63 Step 5 Complete the DLP D348 View ML Series Ether Ports PM Parameters task on page 20 56 Step 6 Complete the DLP D349 View ML Series POS Ports PM Parameters task on page 20 57 Step 7 Complete the DLP D188 View CE Series Ethernet and POS Ports Statistics PM Parameters task on page 18 75 Step 8 Complete the DLP D190 View CE Series E...

Страница 299: ... 3 Complete the DLP D122 Enable Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring task on page 18 21 as needed to enable or disable monitoring of VC4 traffic through intermediate nodes Step 4 Complete the DLP D421 View STM N PM Parameters task on page 21 2 Purpose This procedure creates or deletes Ethernet remote monitoring RMON thresholds for the ONS 15454 SDH Tools Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures ...

Страница 300: ... Create or Delete FC_MR 4 RMON Thresholds Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 If you are already logged in continue with Step 2 Purpose This procedure enables you to view node transmit and receive performance during selected time intervals on an FC_MR 4 card and port to detect possible performance problems Tools Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures Before you monitor perf...

Страница 301: ...itor Performance NTP D302 Create or Delete FC_MR 4 RMON Thresholds Step 2 Perform any of the following tasks as needed DLP D465 Create FC_MR 4 RMON Alarm Thresholds page 21 40 DLP D466 Delete FC_MR 4 RMON Alarm Thresholds page 21 44 Stop You have completed this procedure ...

Страница 302: ...8 8 Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide R7 0 78 17194 01 Chapter 8 Monitor Performance NTP D302 Create or Delete FC_MR 4 RMON Thresholds ...

Страница 303: ...rmation 4 NTP D69 View Alarm Affected Circuits page 9 4 Complete this procedure as needed to find circuits that are affected by a particular alarm or condition 5 NTP D70 View Alarm Counts on the LCD for a Node Slot or Port page 9 5 Complete this procedure as needed to see a statistical count of alarms that have occurred for a slot or port 6 NTP D71 Create Download and Assign Alarm Severity Profile...

Страница 304: ...e the DLP D111 Changing the Maximum Number of Session Entries for Alarm History task on page 18 14 as needed Step 5 Complete the DLP D112 Display Alarms and Conditions Using Time Zone task on page 18 15 as needed Step 6 Complete the DLP D113 Synchronize Alarms task on page 18 15 as needed Purpose Use this procedure to print or export card node or network CTC information in graphical or tabular for...

Страница 305: ...ves any cleared ONS 15454 SDH alarms from the Alarms display The rows of cleared alarms turn white and have a C in their status ST column Figure 18 5 on page 18 17 Step 3 To delete cleared card level alarms a In the node view double click the card graphic for the card you want to open b Click the Alarms tab and then click Delete Cleared Alarms referring to the rules in Step 2 Step 4 To delete clea...

Страница 306: ...arm or condition Note The node view is the default but you can also navigate to the Alarms tab in the network view or card view to perform Step 2 The Select Affected Circuit option appears in the shortcut menu Figure 9 1 Figure 9 1 Select Affected Circuits Option Step 3 Click Select Affected Circuits Purpose Use this procedure to view all circuits if any that are affected by an alarm or condition ...

Страница 307: ...on until you see Slot 3 on the LCD You will also see the direction Status Alm Ct Step 4 Press the Status button to see a summary of alarms and severities against the slot For example you might see Slot 3 Alm CT 0 MJ 1 MN 2 meaning that there are no critical alarms one major alarm and two minor alarms against the slot Step 5 If you want to view the alarms against a port on the card such as Port 3 o...

Страница 308: ...te a New or Cloned Alarm Severity Profile task on page 21 6 This task clones a current alarm profile renames the profile and customizes the new profile Step 3 Complete the DLP D223 Download an Alarm Severity Profile task on page 19 22 This task downloads an alarm severity profile from a CD or a node Note After storing a created or downloaded alarm profile you must go to the node either by logging ...

Страница 309: ...larm profile filtering for all network nodes Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D72 Suppress Alarms or Discontinue Alarm Suppression Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 If you are already logged in continue with Step 2 Step 2 Complete the DLP D430 Suppress Alarm Reporting task on page 21 15 to enable the node to send autonomous messages that clear specific raised al...

Страница 310: ...mation about the ONS 15454 SDH contacts a For external alarms verify that the external device relays are wired to the ENVIR ALARMS IN connector pins b For external controls verify the external device relays are wired to the ENVIR ALARMS OUT connector pins Step 2 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 If you are already logged in continue with Step 3 Step 3 In the node view double cli...

Страница 311: ...from the drop down list The severity determines the severity the alarm has in the Alarms and History tabs and determines whether the LEDs are activated Critical CR Major MJ and Minor MN alarms activate the LEDs Not Alarmed NA and Not Reported NR do not activate LEDs but do report the information in CTC Virtual Wire Choose the virtual wire number from the drop down list to assign the external devic...

Страница 312: ...tioner engine fan generator heat light sprinkler or miscellaneous Trigger Type Choose a trigger type a local minor major or critical alarm a remote minor major or critical alarm or a virtual wire activation Description Enter a description Step 12 To provision the other external controls complete Step 11 for each additional device Step 13 Click Apply Note When you provision an external alarm the al...

Страница 313: ...e Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds for Optical Cards page 10 2 As needed complete this procedure to change line and threshold settings for all optical STM N cards 3 NTP D118 Modify Alarm Interface Controller International Settings page 10 3 As needed complete this procedure to change external alarms and controls and or orderwire settings 4 NTP D91 Upgrade E1 N 14 and DS3 i N 12 Protect Cards f...

Страница 314: ...reshold Settings for the E3 12 Cards page 20 43 DLP D341 Change Line and Threshold Settings for the DS3i N 12 Cards page 20 47 DLP D342 Change Line and Threshold Settings for the STM1E 12 Card page 20 51 Note To change settings on the Alarm Profiles tab see Chapter 9 Manage Alarms Step 4 As needed complete the NTP D108 Back Up the Database procedure on page 15 5 Stop You have completed this proced...

Страница 315: ...P D122 Enable Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring task on page 18 21 To change settings on the Alarm Profiles tab see Chapter 9 Manage Alarms Step 4 Complete the NTP D108 Back Up the Database procedure on page 15 5 Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D118 Modify Alarm Interface Controller International Settings Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 at the node whe...

Страница 316: ...ge 17 49 at the node where you want to convert the E1 N 14 and DS3i N 12 cards from 1 1 to 1 N protection If you are already logged in proceed to Step 2 Step 2 As needed complete the NTP D108 Back Up the Database procedure on page 15 5 Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed DLP D176 Convert E1 N 14 Cards From 1 1 to 1 N Protection page 18 63 DLP D177 Convert DS3i N 12 Cards From 1 1 t...

Страница 317: ...4 RMON Alarm Thresholds page 21 44 Step 4 As needed complete the NTP D108 Back Up the Database procedure on page 15 5 Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D330 Change Card or PPM Service State Note On the STM64 XFP and MRC 12 cards the PPM is equivalent to an optical port Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 at the node where you want to change the card service state S...

Страница 318: ...plained conditions appear on the network If unexplained conditions appear resolve them before continuing Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide c Complete the DLP D147 Export CTC Data task on page 18 38 to export alarm and condition information DLP D132 Provision a Multirate PPM on the MRC 12 Card task on page 18 27 Step 4 As needed complete the DLP D132 Provision a Multirate PPM o...

Страница 319: ...10 7 Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide R7 0 78 17194 01 Chapter 10 Change Card Settings NTP D331 Manage Pluggable Port Modules Stop You have completed this procedure ...

Страница 320: ...10 8 Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide R7 0 78 17194 01 Chapter 10 Change Card Settings NTP D331 Manage Pluggable Port Modules ...

Страница 321: ...ult router subnet mask network configuration settings and static routes 3 NTP D327 Modify OSI Provisioning page 11 3 Complete this procedure as needed to modify Open System Interconnection OSI parameters including the OSI routing mode Target Identifier Address Resolution Protocol TARP routers subnets and IP over CLNS tunnels 4 NTP D202 Customize the CTC Network View page 11 4 As needed complete th...

Страница 322: ...S 15454 SDH networking information and procedures including IP addressing examples static route scenarios Open Shortest Path First OSPF protocol and routing information protocol options are provided in the Management Network Connectivity chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 If you are already logged in continue with Step 2 ...

Страница 323: ...he Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 If you are already logged in continue with Step 2 Step 2 Complete the NTP D108 Back Up the Database procedure on page 15 5 Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed DLP D166 Provision or Modify TARP Operating Parameters page 18 55 DLP D167 Add a Static TID to NSAP Entry to the TARP Data Ca...

Страница 324: ...k View Background Color page 18 36 DLP D435 Change the Default Network View Background Map page 21 24 DLP D268 Apply a Custom Network View Background Map page 19 73 DLP D148 Create Domain Icons page 18 40 DLP D149 Manage Domain Icons page 18 41 DLP D393 Switch Between TDM and DWDM Network Views page 20 82 DLP D269 Enable Dialog Box Do Not Display Option page 19 74 DLP D215 Consolidate Links in Net...

Страница 325: ...page 15 5 Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D277 Modify or Delete Communications Channel Terminations and Provisionable Patchcords Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 If you are already logged in continue with Step 2 Purpose This procedure modifies or deletes card protection settings Tools Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures NTP D170 Create Protection Groups pag...

Страница 326: ...p 2 Step 2 Complete the NTP D108 Back Up the Database procedure on page 15 5 Step 3 As needed complete the DLP D157 Change the Node Timing Source task on page 18 48 Step 4 If you need to change any internal timing settings complete the DLP D70 Set Up Internal Timing task on page 17 61 for the settings you need to modify Caution Internal timing is Stratum 3 and not intended for permanent use All ON...

Страница 327: ...and Security Level on Multiple Nodes page 18 50 DLP D159 Delete a User on a Single Node page 18 50 DLP D161 Delete a User on Multiple Nodes page 18 51 Step 4 Complete the NTP D108 Back Up the Database procedure on page 15 5 Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D87 Change SNMP Settings Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 If you are already logged in continue with Step ...

Страница 328: ... NTP D87 Change SNMP Settings Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed DLP D273 Modify SNMP Trap Destination page 19 77 DLP D163 Delete SNMP Trap Destination page 18 53 Step 4 Complete the NTP D108 Back Up the Database procedure on page 15 5 Stop You have completed this procedure ...

Страница 329: ... Card to the XC VXC 10G Card page 12 4 Complete as needed 3 NTP D314 Upgrade the TCC2 Card to the TCC2P Card page 12 5 Complete as needed 4 NTP D94 Upgrade STM N Cards and Spans Automatically page 12 7 Complete this procedure as needed to upgrade optical cards within subnetwork connection protection SNCP rings multiplex section shared protection rings MS SPRings and 1 1 protection groups 5 NTP D95...

Страница 330: ...mplete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 If you are already logged in continue with Step 2 Step 2 Determine the standby XC VXL 2 5G card The ACT STBY LED of the standby XC VXL 2 5G card is amber and the ACT STBY LED of the active XC VXL 2 5G card is green Note You can also place the cursor on the card graphic in Cisco Transport Controller CTC to display a pop up that identifies the card ...

Страница 331: ...erconnection Equipment Failure alarm appears but it will clear when the upgrade procedure is complete and the node has matching cross connect cards installed Step 7 Physically remove the now standby XC VXL 2 5G card from the shelf and insert the second XC VXL 10G or XC VXC 10G card into the empty cross connect slot a Open the XC VXL 2 5G card ejectors b Slide the XC VXL 2 5G card out of the slot c...

Страница 332: ... ACT STBY LED of the standby XC VXL 10G card is amber and the ACT STBY LED of the active XC VXL 10G card is green Note You can also place the cursor on the card graphic in CTC to display a pop up that identifies the card as Active or Standby Step 3 Physically replace the standby XC VXL 10G card on the shelf with an XC VXC 10G card a Open the XC VXL 10G card ejectors b Slide the card out of the slo...

Страница 333: ...ically remove the now standby XC VXL 10G card from the shelf and insert the second XC VXC 10G card into the empty cross connect slot a Open the XC VXL 10G card ejectors b Slide the XC VXL 10G card out of the slot c Open the ejectors on the XC VXC 10G card d Slide the XC VXC 10G card into the slot along the guide rails e Close the ejectors The upgrade is complete when the second XC VXC 10G card boo...

Страница 334: ...P cards are not compatible with releases prior to Software R4 0 Step 6 Physically replace the standby TCC2 card on the ONS 15454 with a TCC2P card a Check the LED on the faceplate The ACT STBY LED on the faceplate of the TCC2 card indicates whether the card is in active or standby mode A green ACT STBY LED indicates an active card and an amber light indicates a standby card b Open the standby TCC2...

Страница 335: ... the shelf during a database transfer Step 11 If power related alarms occur after the second TCC2P card is installed complete the DLP D33 Measure Voltage task on page 17 26 Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for information about clearing alarms Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D94 Upgrade STM N Cards and Spans Automatically Warning Do not reach into a vacant slot or ...

Страница 336: ...ut and there are no fiber cuts or node power cycles Step 1 Determine the span upgrade you need to perform Valid span upgrades include Four port STM 1 to eight port STM 1 Single port STM 4 to four port STM 4 Single port STM 4 to STM 16 Single port STM 4 to STM 64 Single port STM 4 to MRC 12 Single port STM 4 to STM 16 on MRC 12 STM 16 to STM 64 STM 16 to MRC 12 STM 16 to OC192SR1 STM64IO Short Reac...

Страница 337: ...he upgrade downgrade of all nodes is complete If any other service affecting alarms occur Cisco recommends backing out of the procedure A four node MS SPRing can take up to five minutes to clear all of the MSSP OSYNC alarms Allow extra time for a large MS SPRing to clear all of the MSSP OSYNC alarms Step 4 In network view right click the span you want to upgrade Step 5 Choose Span Upgrade from the...

Страница 338: ...rds Step 6 Repeat Steps 4 through 5 for additional spans in the ring Note The span upgrade process resets the line s CV L threshold to factory default The CV L threshold is reset because the threshold is dependent on line rate Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D95 Upgrade Optical Spans Manually Purpose This procedure upgrades STM N speeds within MS SPRings SNCPs and 1 1 protection groups ...

Страница 339: ...gle port STM 4 to four port STM 4 Single port STM 4 to STM 16 Single port STM 4 to STM 64 Single port STM 4 to MRC 12 STM 16 to STM 64 STM 64 to OC192SR1 STM64IO Short Reach or OC192 STM64 Any Reach Note Do not upgrade an STM 16 to an STM 64 if you have XC VXL 2 5Gs installed The XC VXL 2 5G works only with card speeds up to STM 16 Step 2 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 If you...

Страница 340: ... because the STM1 8 and STM4 4 card can only be installed in these slots Ensure that the STM 1 and STM 4 cards are in these slots before performing a span upgrade to the STM1 8 and STM4 4 The four STM 1 ports will be sequentially mapped to Ports 1 to 4 on the eight port STM 1 card The STM 4 port will be mapped to Port 1 on the four port STM 4 card Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D374 Up...

Страница 341: ...TM 4 card When performing a card upgrade from STM 4 STM 16 or MRC 12 to STM 64 ensure that the STM 4 STM 16 or MRC 12 card is in Slot 4 5 6 or 13 Port migrations are described in Table 12 1 Step 1 Determine the type of upgrade you need to perform and make sure you have the necessary cards Valid card upgrades include Four port STM 1 to eight port STM 1 Single port STM 4 to four port STM 4 STM 16 or...

Страница 342: ...te The Change Card option is available only if the hardware necessary for the upgrade is present for example no upgrade is possible from an STM 64 card unless the XC VXC 10G or XC VXL 10G cards are installed in the node Step 5 Choose the card to upgrade to from the Change to drop down list Step 6 Choose the rate from the Port Rate drop down list This field is available only for multi rate cards St...

Страница 343: ...d Point to Point or Linear ADM to a Two Fiber MS SPRing Automatically page 13 6 Complete as needed 4 NTP D155 Convert a Point to Point or a Linear ADM to a Two Fiber MS SPRing Manually page 13 8 Complete as needed if the in service topology upgrade wizard is not available or you need to back out of the wizard 5 NTP D351 Convert a Point to Point or Linear ADM to an SNCP Automatically page 13 10 Com...

Страница 344: ...g conditions for adding a new node The terminal network has no critical or major alarms The node that you will add has no critical or major alarms The node has compatible software version with that of the terminal nodes The node has four unused optical ports matching the speed of the 1 1 protection and no DCC has been provisioned on these four ports Fiber is available to connect the added node to ...

Страница 345: ...on task on page 20 66 Step 6 Enter the node host name or IP address or choose the name of the new node from the drop down list If you type in the name make sure it is identical to the actual node name The node name is case sensitive Step 7 When you have the name of the node in the menu click Next The Select Protection Group Ports page appears Figure 13 1 Step 8 From the drop down lists select the ...

Страница 346: ...ext Step 14 Follow each step as instructed by the wizard as it guides you through the process of refibering the working path between nodes and forcing the traffic back to the working path Step 15 The Force Traffic to Working Path page states that it is about to force the traffic from the protect to working path for the terminal nodes When you are ready to proceed click Next Step 16 The Completed p...

Страница 347: ...int to point node Step 9 Display the point to point node that will connect to the new node in CTC node view Step 10 Complete the NTP D24 Verify Card Installation procedure on page 4 2 to ensure that the point to point node has STM N cards installed that can connect to the new node Step 11 Create a 1 1 protection group for the STM N cards in the point to point node that will connect to the new node...

Страница 348: ...e nodes that support the point to point or linear ADM span Step 4 Complete the DLP D363 Provision Regenerator Section DCC Terminations task on page 20 68 at the nodes that support the point to point or linear ADM span Alternatively if additional bandwidth is needed for CTC management complete the DLP D364 Provision Multiplex Section DCC Terminations task on page 20 71 Provision the slot in each no...

Страница 349: ...sure all steps are completed accurately then start this procedure again Step 8 In the network graphic double click a MS SPRing span line If the span line is DCC connected to other MS SPRing cards that constitute a complete ring the lines turn blue If the lines do not form a complete ring double click span lines until a complete ring is formed Click Next Step 9 The SNCP to MS SPRing Topology Conver...

Страница 350: ... Circuits on Span window appears Step 6 Verify that the total number of active VC4 circuits does not exceed 50 percent of the span bandwidth In the Circuits column there is a block titled Unused This number should exceed 50 percent of the span bandwidth Note If the span is an STM 16 no more than 8 VC4s can be provisioned on the span If the span is an STM 64 no more than 32 VC4s can be provisioned ...

Страница 351: ...orts the point to point or linear ADM span Step 9 Linear ADM only Physically remove the protect fibers from all nodes in the linear ADM for example the fiber running from Node 2 Slot 13 to Node 3 Slot 13 can be removed Figure 13 3 Figure 13 3 Linear ADM to MS SPRing Conversion Step 10 Create the ring by connecting the protect fiber from one end node to the protect port on the other end node For ex...

Страница 352: ...g on an MS SPRing protect VC4 Step 14 Complete the NTP D41 Create the MS SPRing procedure on page 5 13 to put the nodes into an MS SPRing Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D351 Convert a Point to Point or Linear ADM to an SNCP Automatically Note When upgrading VT tunnels CTC does not convert the VT tunnel to SNCP but instead creates a secondary tunnel for the alternate path The result is ...

Страница 353: ...ting option is not checked in the Circuit Attributes pane Step 7 Click Next Step 8 Complete one of the following tasks a To route the new SNCP circuit automatically complete the DLP D471 Automatically Route an SNCP Circuit for a Topology Upgrade task on page 21 48 b To route the new SNCP circuit manually complete the DLP D470 Manually Route an SNCP Circuit for a Topology Upgrade task on page 21 47...

Страница 354: ...he DLP D27 Delete Circuits task on page 17 21 and the NTP D323 Create an Automatically Routed High Order Circuit procedure on page 6 55 to delete and recreate the circuits one at a time Note If you want to add additional nodes to the SNCP see the NTP D105 Add an SNCP Node procedure on page 14 10 Note An SNCP is the default configuration if the cards installed are installed and the DCCs are configu...

Страница 355: ...string All in either upper or lower case letters This is a TL1 keyword and will be rejected Do not choose a name that is already assigned to another MS SPRing Reversion time Set the amount of time that will pass before the traffic reverts to the original working path following a ring switch The default is 5 minutes Ring reversions can be set to Never Step 5 Click Next If the SNCP to MS SPRing Topo...

Страница 356: ...fy the following On the network view graphic a green span line appears between all MS SPRing nodes All E W MISMATCH RING MISMATCH APSCIMP DFLTK and MS SPRingOSYNC alarms are cleared Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for alarm troubleshooting Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D210 Convert an SNCP to a Two Fiber MS SPRing Manually Caution This procedure is service affec...

Страница 357: ...he first half of the capacity is exceeded this procedure cannot be completed Bandwidth must be 50 percent unassigned to convert to MS SPRing Refer to your site plan for relocating circuits if these requirements are not met Step 6 Repeat Steps 1 to 5 for each node in the SNCP that you will convert to an MS SPRing When all nodes comply with Step 5 continue with the next step Step 7 Save all circuit ...

Страница 358: ...eir existing VC4s Therefore they will be located on the working path of the four fiber MS SPRing and will have full MS SPRing protection To route PCA circuits on protection channels in the four fiber MS SPRing delete and recreate the circuits after the upgrade For example if you upgrade a two fiber STM 16 MS SPRing to four fiber PCA circuits on the protection VC4s VCs 8 to 16 in the two fiber MS S...

Страница 359: ... the Unlocked enabled service state on each new STM N card Step 6 Test the new fiber connections using procedures standard for your site Step 7 Convert the MS SPRing a From the View menu choose Go to Network View Click the Provisioning MS SPRing tabs b Choose the two fiber MS SPRing you want to convert then click the Upgrade to 4 Fiber button c In the Upgrade MS SPRing dialog box set the amount of...

Страница 360: ...n length The alphanumeric character strings that can be used are 0 to 9 and A to Z You can combine numbers and letters and use upper or lower case letters Do not use the character string All in either upper or lower case letters because it is a TL1 keyword Do not choose a name that is already assigned to another MS SPRing Reversion time If needed change the amount of time that will pass before the...

Страница 361: ...rt Network Configurations NTP D159 Modify an MS SPRing All E W MISMATCH RING MISMATCH APSCIMP DFLTK MSSP OSYNC and Node ID Mismatch alarms are cleared Note For definitions of these alarms see the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide Stop You have completed this procedure ...

Страница 362: ...13 20 Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide R7 0 78 17194 01 Chapter 13 Convert Network Configurations NTP D159 Modify an MS SPRing ...

Страница 363: ...e for applicable tasks DLPs 1 NTP D353 Add an MS SPRing Node page 14 2 Complete as needed 2 NTP D213 Remove an MS SPRing Node page 14 7 Complete as needed 3 NTP D105 Add an SNCP Node page 14 10 Complete as needed 4 NTP D106 Remove an SNCP Node page 14 12 Complete as needed 5 NTP D280 Add a Node to a Linear ADM Manually page 14 14 Complete as needed to add a node to the end of a linear ADM This pro...

Страница 364: ...here you will add the node In the diagram identify the east and west MS SPRing STM N trunk span cards that will connect to the new node This information is essential to complete this procedure without error Figure 14 1 shows a drawing of a three node two fiber MS SPRing that uses Slots 5 and 12 for the MS SPRing trunk cards The dashed arrow shows the new fiber connections that will be made to add ...

Страница 365: ... fiber MS SPRing The dashed arrow shows the new fiber connections that will be made to add the fourth node For four fiber MS SPRings two fiber sets will be reconnected the working fiber and the protect fiber 78740 West East West East West East West East Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx New Node Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 2 Node 1 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 3 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Working ...

Страница 366: ...able to connect the new node to the existing nodes Refer to the diagram drawn in Step 2 Step 6 Complete the NTP D35 Verify Node Turn Up procedure on page 5 2 To have CTC visibility to the new node after it is added you must be an authorized user on the node and you must have IP connectivity to the node Step 7 Check to see if the new node IP address is on the same subnet as other nodes in the netwo...

Страница 367: ... If alarms appear investigate and resolve them before continuing Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for procedures Step 15 Using the information recorded in Steps 11 and 12 and the diagram created in Step 2 create an MS SPRing on the new node See the DLP D242 Create an MS SPRing on a Single Node task on page 19 45 Step 16 Optional Create test circuits making sure they pass thro...

Страница 368: ...ck it to display the node in node view Step 25 Click the Provisioning MS SPRing tabs Step 26 Click Ring Map Verify that the new node appears on the Ring Map with the other MS SPRing nodes then click OK Step 27 From the View menu choose Go to Network View and check the following a Click the Provisioning MS SPRing tabs Verify that the new node appears in the Node column b Click the Alarms tab Verify...

Страница 369: ...task on page 17 49 at the node you will remove If you are already logged in continue with Step 2 Step 4 Create a diagram of the MS SPRing where you will remove the node You can draw the MS SPRing manually or you can print it from CTC by performing the following steps a From the View menu choose Go to Network View b Click the Provisioning MS SPRing tabs c Choose the desired MS SPRing then click Edi...

Страница 370: ...task on page 20 64 to verify that circuits passing through the node to be deleted enter and exit the node on the same VC4 and or VC3 VC11 or VC12 Step 11 From the View menu choose Go to Network View Step 12 Referring to the diagram created in Step 4 complete the DLP D303 Initiate an MS SPRing Force Ring Switch task on page 20 3 at each node that connects to the target removal node to force traffic...

Страница 371: ...Clear an MS SPRing Force Ring Switch task on page 18 82 to remove the Force protection switches Step 21 According to local site practice complete the NTP D341 Two Fiber MS SPRing Acceptance Test procedure on page 5 14 Step 22 Complete the DLP D79 Remove Pass through Connections task on page 17 71 Step 23 Log back into a node on the reduced ring In the CTC Login dialog box uncheck the Disable Netwo...

Страница 372: ...Partial_TL1 in the network before proceeding However if you want to continue with Step 6 match the number of partial circuits and circuit names that existed before and after adding a path protection node This ensures that no additional partial circuits are created after this procedure is completed Step 6 Verify the card installation on the new node See the NTP D24 Verify Card Installation procedur...

Страница 373: ...op down list The Partial_TL1 circuits if any are displayed Resolve any partial circuits both Partial and Partial_TL1 in the network before proceeding However if you want to continue with Step 13 match the number of partial circuits and circuit names that existed before and after adding a path protection node This ensures that no additional partial circuits are created after this procedure is compl...

Страница 374: ... rings passing through one or more nodes more than once on the new node Step 23 In network view right click the new node and choose Update Circuits With New Node from the shortcut menu Wait for the confirmation dialog box to appear Verify that the number of updated circuits that appears in the dialog box is correct the circuit count should be same as obtained in Step 4 Note If the circuits take mo...

Страница 375: ...it has multiple drops delete only the drops that terminate on the node you are deleting Step 5 Complete the DLP D357 Verify Pass Through Circuits task on page 20 64 to verify that circuits passing through the node to be deleted enter and exit the node on the same VC4 and or VC3 or VC12 Step 6 Complete the DLP D197 Initiate an SNCP Force Switch task on page 18 84 for all spans connected to the node...

Страница 376: ...ing STM N ports have DCC terminations and the STM N cards are in a 1 1 protection group Caution If the linear ADM carries traffic you cannot add a node between two linear nodes unless you delete and recreate the circuits Use this procedure to add a node to the end of the linear ADM Step 1 At the new node complete one of the following procedures If the node has not been turned up complete all proce...

Страница 377: ...7 Step 9 Connect the protect card at the existing linear ADM node to the protect card at the new node Step 10 Complete DLP D73 Create a 1 1 Protection Group task on page 17 64 for the two STM N cards that connect to the new node Step 11 Complete the DLP D363 Provision Regenerator Section DCC Terminations task on page 20 68 for the working STM N card that connects to the working card on the new nod...

Страница 378: ...node The terminal network has no critical or major alarms The node that you will add has no critical or major alarms The node has compatible software version with that of the terminal nodes The node has four unused optical ports matching the speed of the 1 1 protection and no DCC has been provisioned on these four ports Fiber is available to connect the added node to the terminal nodes If all of t...

Страница 379: ... and the Update Circuit s on Node Name dialog box appears Note The Back button is not enabled in the wizard You can click the Cancel button at this point and choose the Yes button if you want to cancel the upgrade protection procedure If the procedure fails after you have physically moved the fiber optic cables you will need to restore the fiber optic cables to the original positions and verify th...

Страница 380: ...can then change the protection setting back to bidirectional Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 at a node in the network where you will remove the node Step 2 From the View menu choose Go to Network View Step 3 Click the Alarms tab a Verify that the alarm filter is not on See the DLP D227 Disable Alarm Filtering task on page 19 25 as necessary b Verify that no unexplained ...

Страница 381: ...ds click Force b In the Confirm Force Operation dialog box click Yes c In the Selected Group area verify that the following appears Protect port Protect Standby FORCE_SWITCH_TO_WORKING PORT STATE Working port Working Active FORCE_SWITCH_TO_WORKING PORT STATE Step 13 From the View menu choose Go to Network View Step 14 On the network map double click the other node where you initiated a Force switc...

Страница 382: ...14 Add and Remove Nodes NTP D322 Remove an In Service Node from a Linear ADM Step 23 Relaunch CTC at any one of the nodes that were adjacent to the target node The nodes will now show the circuit status as DISCOVERED when checked Stop You have completed this procedure ...

Страница 383: ...cords page 15 10 Complete as needed 7 NTP D214 Off Load the Audit Trail Record page 15 12 Complete as needed 8 NTP D313 Off Load the Diagnostics File page 15 13 Complete as needed 9 NTP D231 Initiate or Clear an External Switching Command page 15 14 Complete as needed to initiate a Force switch Manual switch lockout or lock on 10 NTP D112 Clean Fiber Connectors page 15 15 Complete as needed 11 NTP...

Страница 384: ...ance NEBS 3E and later versions of the ONS 15454 SDH use a reusable air filter Step 2 If the air filter is installed in the external filter brackets slide the filter out of the brackets while being careful not to dislodge any dust that might have collected on the filter and proceed to Step 9 Figure 15 1 illustrates a reusable fan tray air filter in an external filter bracket Step 3 If the filter i...

Страница 385: ...ose the handles Step 6 Pull the handles and slide the fan tray assembly one inch 25 4 mm out of the shelf assembly and wait until the fans stop Step 7 When the fans have stopped pull the fan tray assembly completely out of the shelf assembly Step 8 Gently remove the air filter from the shelf assembly Be careful not to dislodge any dust that might have collected on the filter Step 9 Visually inspec...

Страница 386: ...ly and slide the dry clean air filter into the recessed compartment at the bottom of the shelf assembly Put the front edge of the air filter flush against the front edge of the recessed compartment Push the fan tray back into the shelf assembly Caution If the fan tray does not slide all the way to the back of the shelf assembly pull the fan tray out and readjust the position of the reusable filter...

Страница 387: ... page 17 49 at the node that you want to back up If you are already logged in proceed to Step 2 Step 2 In node view click the Maintenance Database tabs Step 3 Click Backup Step 4 Save the database on the workstation s hard drive or on network storage Use an appropriate file name with the db file extension for example database db Step 5 Click Save Step 6 Click OK in the confirmation dialog box Stop...

Страница 388: ...o the NTP D169 Set Up CTC Network Access procedure on page 4 7 Caution To avoid a node IP and secure IP ending up in the same domain after restoring a database ensure that the node IP stored in the database differs in domain from that of the node in repeater mode Also after restoring a database ensure that the node IP and secure IP differ in domain Note The following parameters are not backed up a...

Страница 389: ...is present choose CLEAR from the drop down list and click Apply Note A switch if present might have been caused by a standing Wait to Restore WTR condition When a switch event is cleared NO COMMAND appears in the column to indicate that the switch event is no longer in effect Step 5 In node view click the Maintenance Database tabs Figure 15 2 Figure 15 2 Restoring the TCC2 TCC2P Database Step 6 Cl...

Страница 390: ...Additional information about the ONS 15454 SDH implementation of OSI is provided in the Management Network Connectivity chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 If you are already logged in continue with Step 2 Step 2 Perform any of the following tasks as needed DLP D183 View IS IS Routing Information Base page 18 70 Purpose Th...

Страница 391: ...o recommends that you save the node database to safe location if you will not be restoring the node using the database provided on the software CD Purpose This procedure reinitializes the ONS 15454 SDH using the CTC reinitialization tool Reinitialization uploads a new software package to the TCC2 TCC2P cards clears the node database and restores the factory default parameters Tools Equipment ONS 1...

Страница 392: ... on page 19 47 Step 3 If you are using UNIX complete the DLP D245 Use the Reinitialization Tool to Clear the Database and Upload Software UNIX task on page 19 49 Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D312 Viewing the Audit Trail Records Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 at the node where you want to view the audit trail log If you are already logged in continue with ...

Страница 393: ...following options Reset Sorting Resets the column to the default setting Hide Column Hides the column from view Reset Columns Order Visibility Displays all hidden columns Row Count Provides a numerical count of log entries Step 6 Shift click the column heading if you want to display an incrementally sorted list Stop You have completed this procedure Table 15 1 Audit Trail Column Definitions Column...

Страница 394: ...ordPad Microsoft Word imported etc Step 7 Click Save The 640 entries are saved in this file Subsequent entries continue with the next number in the sequence rather than starting over Note Archiving does not delete entries from the CTC audit trail log However entries can be self deleted by the system after the log maximum is reached If you archived the entries you cannot reimport the log file back ...

Страница 395: ...in the File Name field You do not have to give the archive file a particular extension It is a compressed file gzip that can be unzipped and read by Cisco Technical Support Step 6 Click Save The Get Diagnostics status window shows a progress bar indicating the percentage of the file being saved then shows Get Diagnostics Complete Step 7 Click OK Stop You have completed this procedure Purpose This ...

Страница 396: ... a lockout on the protect card is permissible Step 6 To remove a lock on or lockout and return a protection group to its usual switching method complete the DLP D203 Clear a Lock On or Lockout task on page 19 3 Step 7 Complete the DLP D303 Initiate an MS SPRing Force Ring Switch task on page 20 3 as needed Step 8 Complete the DLP D194 Clear an MS SPRing Force Ring Switch task on page 18 82 as need...

Страница 397: ...minutes or more Step 3 Complete the DLP D205 Clean Fiber Connectors with CLETOP task on page 19 4 as necessary Step 4 Complete the DLP D206 Clean the Fiber Adapters task on page 19 4 as necessary Note To clean multi fiber optic connectors complete the DLP D204 Clean Multi Fiber Optic Cable Connectors task on page 19 3 as necessary Caution Do not reuse the optical swabs Keep unused swabs off of wor...

Страница 398: ...3 Soft Reset a CE100T 8 Card Using CTC task on page 18 3 as needed Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D215 View G Series Ethernet Maintenance Information Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 If you are already logged in continue with Step 2 Purpose This procedure resets TCC2 TCC2P electrical optical Ethernet and FC_MR 4 cards Tools Equipment None Prerequisite Procedu...

Страница 399: ...e Bandwidth tabs Step 5 Click Retrieve Bandwidth Usage The current STS bandwidth usage information appears Step 6 To view J1 path trace information click the Maintenance Path Trace tabs and then click Retrieve Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D266 View E Series Ethernet Maintenance Information Step 1 Complete the DLP D60 Log into CTC task on page 17 49 If you are already logged in contin...

Страница 400: ... Click the Maintenance Timing Report tabs Step 3 In the Timing Report area you can view node timing information The date and time of the report appear at the top of the report The time stamp is the same as the alarms time stamp and can be configured using the DLP D112 Display Alarms and Conditions Using Time Zone task on page 18 15 Table 15 2 describes the report fields and entries Step 4 To updat...

Страница 401: ...rated value to bring timing to 0 PPM Free run state can occur when a Force switch to the Internal clock is initiated when all references fail without the 140 seconds of holdover data or when only Internal timing references are defined This status appears for NE references only NO_SYNC_STATE A synchronization timing reference is not defined BITS 1 Out or BITS 2 Out default to this status until an S...

Страница 402: ...g tab BITS 1 The timing facility is a building integrated timing supply BITS clock attached to the node s BITS 1 pins BITS 2 The timing facility is a BITS clock attached to the node s BITS 2 pins STM N card with port number If the node is set to line timing the STM N card and port provisioned as the timing reference Internal clock The node is using its internal clock State Indicates the timing ref...

Страница 403: ...CTC task on page 17 49 at the node where you want to replace the card Step 2 From the View menu choose Go to Network View Step 3 Click the Alarms tab and complete the following substeps a Verify that the alarm filter is not on See the DLP D227 Disable Alarm Filtering task on page 19 25 as necessary SSM Quality Indicates the SSM timing quality 8 to 10 SSM quality messages might be displayed For a l...

Страница 404: ...s Connect Cards area choose Switch c Click Yes in the Confirm Switch dialog box Note After the active XC VXL 10G XC VXL 2 5G or XC VXC 10G goes into standby the original standby slot becomes active This causes the ACT STBY LED to become green on the former standby card Step 6 Physically remove the standby XC VXL 10G XC VXL 2 5G or XC VXC 10G card from the ONS 15454 SDH Step 7 Insert the replacemen...

Страница 405: ...d later shelf assembly Fan Tray2 2 5A Fan Tray 15454E FTA 60V 2A Fan Tray 15454E FTA 48V 10G Cards3 3 10G cards include the XC VXC 10G XC VXL 10G STM 64 and STM 16 any slot AS Ethernet Cards4 4 2 5G indicates cards compatible with the XC VXL 2 5G cross connect card E100T 12 E1000 2 E100T G E1000 2 G G1K 4 ML100T 12 ML1000 2 10G indicates cards compatible with the XC VXC 10G and XC VXL 10G cross co...

Страница 406: ...Step 6 Pull the handles and slide the fan tray assembly one inch 25 4 mm out of the shelf assembly and wait until the fans stop Step 7 When the fans have stopped pull the fan tray assembly completely out of the shelf assembly Figure 15 5 shows the location of the fan tray Figure 15 5 Removing or Replacing the Fan Tray Assembly Front Door Removed Step 8 If you are replacing the fan tray air filter ...

Страница 407: ...f the Defaults Selector column to display all available NE defaults in the Default Name column To selectively display just the defaults for a given card type for node level or for CTC level you can drill down the Defaults Selector menu structure Step 4 Locate a default that you want to change in the Default Name column Step 5 Click the Default Value column for the default property you are changing...

Страница 408: ...sioning Click Yes Step 8 If you are modifying the IIOP Listener Port setting a dialog box appears warning you that the node will reboot and asks if you want to continue Click Yes Stop You have completed this procedure NTP D346 Import Network Element Defaults Note For a list of card and node default settings refer to the Network Element Defaults appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual ...

Страница 409: ... the node in order for the default to take effect Before you change a default view the Side Effects column of the Defaults editor right click a column header and select Show Column Side Effects and be prepared for the occurrence of any side effects listed for that default Step 8 If you are modifying node level defaults a dialog box appears to confirm that you wan to apply defaults for node level a...

Страница 410: ...p 2 Click the Provisioning Defaults tabs Step 3 Click Export Step 4 If the desired file to export to does not appear in the Export Defaults to File dialog box or does not yet exist click Browse and browse to the directory where you want to export the data then either choose or type in to create the file to export to the defaults will be exported as a text file delimited by equals signs Step 5 Clic...

Страница 411: ...g with the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Plug the wristband into the ESD jack located on the fan tray assembly or on the lower right outside edge of the shelf assembly To access the ESD plug on the shelf assembly open the front door of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH The front door is grounded to prevent electrical shock Step 1 Identify the node that you want to power down If no cards are installed go to Step 13 If...

Страница 412: ... no circuits appear Step 5 In node view click the Provisioning Protection tabs and delete all protection groups a Click the protection group that needs to be deleted and click Delete b Click Yes Repeat until no protection groups appear Step 6 In node view click the Provisioning Comm Channels tabs and delete all RS DCC MS DCC GCC or OSC terminations a Click the regenerator section data communicatio...

Страница 413: ...card in CTC Physically remove it after all the other cards have been deleted and removed Step 13 Shut off the power from the power supply that feeds the node Step 14 Disconnect the node from its external fuse source Step 15 Store all the cards you removed and update inventory records according to local site practice Stop You have completed this procedure ...

Страница 414: ...16 4 Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide R7 0 78 17194 01 Chapter 16 Power Down the Node NTP D114 Power Down the Node ...

Страница 415: ...astic and a smaller box of items needed for installation Step 3 To remove the shelf grasp both rings of the shelf removal strap and slowly lift the shelf out of the box Step 4 Open the smaller box of installation materials and verify that you have all items listed in the Cisco Supplied Equipment section on page 1 2 Note The fan tray assembly is shipped separately Step 5 Return to your originating ...

Страница 416: ...l The arrow turns white In the Selected Span area the From and To fields provide span information The source VC12 appears Step 3 If you want to change the source VC12 adjust the Source VC12 field otherwise continue with Step 4 Step 4 If you want to change the source TUG2 TUG3 VC3 or VC4 adjust the TUG2 TUG3 VC3 or VC4 fields otherwise continue with Step 5 Purpose This task verifies that all parts ...

Страница 417: ...irectional Step 1 Verify that IP addresses are provisioned at both the source and destination nodes of the planned tunnel For more information see the DLP D249 Provision IP Settings task on page 19 52 Step 2 In network view click the Provisioning Overhead Circuits tabs Step 3 Click Create Step 4 In the Overhead Circuit Creation dialog box complete the following in the Circuit Attributes area Name ...

Страница 418: ... SDH requires 616 5 mm 24 24 inch minimum of vertical rack space and 25 mm 1 inch below the installed shelf assembly to allow air flow to the fan intake If a second ONS 15454 SDH is installed above a shelf assembly the air ramp between the shelves provides space for air flow To ensure the mounting is secure use two to four M6 mounting screws for each side of the shelf assembly A shelf assembly sho...

Страница 419: ...ets Step 4 Lift the shelf assembly to the desired position in the rack Step 5 Align the screw holes on the mounting brackets with the mounting holes in the rack Step 6 Using the Phillips screwdriver install one mounting screw in each side of the assembly Step 7 When the shelf assembly is secured to the rack install the remaining mounting screws Note Use at least one set of the horizontal screw slo...

Страница 420: ...nto the holes that will not be used to mount the shelf Let the screws protrude sufficiently to hold the mounting brackets Step 4 Lift the shelf assembly to the desired position in the rack Step 5 Align the screw holes on the mounting bracket with the mounting holes in the rack Step 6 Have one person hold the shelf assembly in place while the other person installs one mounting screw in each side of...

Страница 421: ...lled above a shelf assembly the air ramp between the shelves provides space for air flow When using third party equipment above the ONS 15454 SDH provide a minimum of 25 mm 1 inch between the third party unit and the bottom of the ONS 15454 SDH The third party equipment must not vent heat upward into the ONS 15454 SDH Step 1 Mount the first ONS 15454 SDH in the bottom of the rack using the DLP D5 ...

Страница 422: ... air ramp above the ONS 15454 SDH The air ramp is needed if you install more than one shelf in the ETSI rack Install the air ramp below the top shelf assembly To ensure that the air ramp is secure use one or two M6 mounting screws for each side of the shelf assembly Figure 17 3 61583 Fuse and Alarm Panel mountable in the rack if the rack is 2200 mm 86 6 in high or higher Air Ramp ETSIs SDH Air Ram...

Страница 423: ...put is located on the outside of the shelf assembly on the right side It is labeled ESD on the top and bottom Always wear an ESD wrist strap and connect the strap to the ESD plug when working on the ONS 15454 SDH Step 1 Open the front door lock The ONS 15454 SDH comes with a pinned hex key for locking and unlocking the front door Turn the key counterclockwise to unlock the door and clockwise to lo...

Страница 424: ...e NTP DLP D9 Remove the Front Door Step 1 Unscrew the nut holding the ground wire to the shelf Remove the nut and washer Step 2 Remove the ground wire from the shelf Step 3 Hold the door at the top left corner and remove the door from its hinges Figure 17 4 Purpose This task removes the front cabinet compartment door Tools Equipment Open end wrench Prerequisite Procedures DLP D8 Open the Front Cab...

Страница 425: ...p 2 Click the Provisioning MS SPRing tabs Step 3 Click Create MS SPRing Step 4 In the MS SPRing Creation dialog box set the MS SPRing properties Ring Type Choose four fiber Purpose This task creates a four fiber MS SPRing using the MS SPRing wizard Tools Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP D60 Log into CTC page 17 49 Required As Needed As needed required to complete MS SPRing setup Onsite R...

Страница 426: ...epending on the problem click Back to start over or click Cancel to cancel the operation d Complete the NTP D40 Provision MS SPRing Nodes procedure on page 5 10 making sure all steps are completed accurately then start this task again Step 6 In the network graphic double click an MS SPRing span line If the span line is DCC connected to other MS SPRing cards constituting a complete ring the lines t...

Страница 427: ...ferent places in the grounding lug Step 4 Locate the grounding receptacle on the side panel of the shelf Figure 17 5 Step 5 Place the grounding lug against the grounding receptacle on the side panel of the shelf Step 6 Insert one of the screws through the locking washer and through the hole in the grounding lug Insert the screw into the threaded holes on the right side of the shelf Ensure that the...

Страница 428: ...dure Guide R7 0 78 17194 01 Chapter 17 DLPs D1 to D99 DLP D16 Connect the Office Ground to the ONS 15454 SDH Figure 17 5 Grounding the ONS 15454 SDH Step 9 Return to your originating procedure NTP 78101 FAN FAIL CR IT MAJ MIN Ground ...

Страница 429: ...ng chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for possible causes Note Only use listed compression type connectors when terminating the battery battery return and ground conductors Connectors must be suitable for copper conductors Purpose This task connects power to the ONS 15454 SDH shelf Tools Equipment 2 Phillips screwdriver Medium slot head screwdriver Small slot head screwdriver...

Страница 430: ... connector on the end of the power cable to the power FMEC Step 3 Tighten the screws of the connector on the power cable Step 4 Connect the power cable to the fuse panel or power source Use the pin connections in Table 17 1 Caution Do not use the yellow and green conductor wire for secondary grounding This wire will be removed in a future release Step 5 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP...

Страница 431: ...de of the shelf place the black lead of the voltmeter to the frame ground Place the red test lead to the BAT1 A side battery connection red cable Verify that it reads between 40 5 VDC and 57 VDC Then place the red test lead of the voltmeter to the RET1 A side return ground black cable and verify that no voltage is present Note The voltages 40 5 VDC and 57 VDC are respectively the minimum and maxim...

Страница 432: ...uld review the relative fiber type and optics specifications to determine attenuation dispersion and other characteristics to ensure appropriate deployment Step 1 Plan your fiber connections Use the same plan for all 1 1 nodes Step 2 Align the keyed ridge of the cable connector with the transmit Tx connector of a working STM N card at one node and plug the other end of the fiber into the receive R...

Страница 433: ...ose Go to Network View Step 2 On the network map double click the node with the node ID you want to change Step 3 Click the Provisioning MS SPRing tabs Step 4 Choose a Node ID number Do not choose a number already assigned to another node in the same MS SPRing Step 5 Click Apply Purpose This task allows you to view E Series Ethernet circuits and the Ethernet front ports operating with Spanning Tre...

Страница 434: ...ion wizard in the Route Review and Edit area choose the member number from the Route Member Number drop down list Step 2 Click the source node icon if it is not already selected Purpose This task sets the CTC Alerts dialog box to open for all alerts for circuit deletion errors only or never The CTC Alerts dialog box displays network disconnection Send PDIP inconsistency circuit deletion status con...

Страница 435: ... node through all intermediary nodes Step 6 Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for each member Step 7 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D27 Delete Circuits Step 1 Complete the NTP D108 Back Up the Database procedure on page 15 5 Step 2 Verify that traffic is no longer carried on the circuit and that the circuit can be safely deleted Step 3 Investigate all network alarms and resolve any problems t...

Страница 436: ...Box for Automatic Popup task on page 17 20 If the CTC Alerts dialog box is not set to open automatically with a notification the red triangle inside the CTC Alerts toolbar icon indicates that a notification exists Step 8 Complete one of the following If you checked Notify when completed the CTC Alerts dialog box appears If you want to save the information continue with Step 9 If you do not want to...

Страница 437: ...st Span Reversion Set the amount of time that will pass before the traffic reverts to the original working path following a span reversion The default is 5 minutes Span reversions can be set to Never If you set a reversion time the times must be the same for both ends of the span That is if Node A s west fiber is connected to Node B s east port the Node A west span reversion time must be the same ...

Страница 438: ...ercentage of total RS DCC bandwidth used in the IP tunnel the minimum percentage is 10 percent If you are converting an IP tunnel to a traditional DCC tunnel check the Change to RS DCC Tunnel check box Step 7 Click Apply Step 8 In the confirmation dialog box click Yes to continue Step 9 In the Circuit Changed status box click OK to acknowledge that the circuit change was successful Step 10 Return ...

Страница 439: ...Unlocked enabled service state To place circuit ports in the Locked enabled disabled service state see the DLP D214 Change the Service State for a Port task on page 19 10 Step 1 From the View menu choose Go to Network View Step 2 Click the Provisioning Overhead Circuits tabs Purpose This task repairs circuits that are in the PARTIAL status as a result of node IP address changes Tools Equipment Non...

Страница 440: ...heck that the FMEC cover is seated correctly verify that it can be easily closed without disturbing cables Step 4 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D33 Measure Voltage Step 1 Using a voltmeter verify the office ground and power a Place the black lead positive on the frame ground on the bay Hold it there while completing Step b b Place the red lead negative on the fuse power points on th...

Страница 441: ... the Tools menu choose Manage VLANS Step 3 In the All VLANs dialog box click the VLAN that you want to remove Step 4 Click Delete Step 5 In the confirmation dialog box click Yes Step 6 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D35 Delete a Node from the Current Session or Login Group Purpose This task removes VLANs from a domain Tools Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures Circuit creation proc...

Страница 442: ...y available if the card has multiple ports VCs do not appear if they are already in use by other circuits Step 4 Click Next Step 5 From the Node drop down list choose the destination node Step 6 From the Slot drop down list choose the slot containing the ML Series or FC_MR 4 card where the circuit will terminate destination card If a card s capacity is fully utilized the card does not appear in th...

Страница 443: ... is normal and happens each time an active TCC2 TCC2P card goes through a software initiated reset Step 1 In node view right click the TCC2 TCC2P card to reveal a shortcut menu Step 2 Click Reset Card Step 3 Click Yes when the confirmation dialog box appears Step 4 Click OK when the Lost connection to node changing to Network View message appears Note For LED behavior during a TCC2 TCC2P reboot se...

Страница 444: ...TP DLP D39 Install Ethernet Cards Step 1 Open the card latches ejectors Step 2 Use the latches ejectors to firmly slide the card along the guide rails until the card plugs into the receptacle at the back of the slot Step 3 Verify that the card is inserted correctly and close the latches ejectors on the card Note It is possible to close the latches ejectors when the card is not completely plugged i...

Страница 445: ...n port in a 1 1 group the working port must have a DCC termination provisioned As needed complete the DLP D363 Provision Regenerator Section DCC Terminations task on page 20 68 or DLP D364 Provision Multiplex Section DCC Terminations task on page 20 71 Note An optical port requires two patchcords when the remote end is Y cable protected or is an add drop multiplexer or multiplexer demultiplexer po...

Страница 446: ... be different if the patchcord is set up between two cards on the same node c Click the desired termination slot port from the list of available slots ports The origination port and the termination port must be different Step 5 If you need to provision Tx and Rx separately for multiplexer demultiplexer cards check the Separate Tx Rx check box If not continue with Step 6 The origination and termina...

Страница 447: ...e NTP DLP D42 Install Fiber Optic Cables on an LGX Interface Step 1 Align the keyed ridge of the cable connector with the receiving SC connector on the LGX faceplate connection point Each card supports at least one transmit and one receive connector to create an optical carrier port Note The OC12 IR STM4 SH 1310 4 and the OC3 IR 4 STM1 SH 1310 multiport card faceplates have four ports Purpose This...

Страница 448: ...on group you want to switch Step 3 In the Selected Group area select the card and port you want to switch Step 4 Click Manual or Force If you choose a Manual switch the command will switch traffic only if the path has an error rate less than the signal degrade SD bit error rate threshold A Force switch will switch traffic even if the path has SD or signal fail SF condition however a Force switch w...

Страница 449: ...dialog box click Yes DLP D45 Install the Fiber Boot Note You can install the fiber boots on the fiber optic cables before or after the fibers are attached to the optical card Note The fiber boot does not support the STM16 SH AS 1310 STM16 LH AS 1550 and STM64 LH 1550 cards The boots are not necessary for these cards because of the angled SC connectors on the cards Purpose This procedure explains h...

Страница 450: ...underneath the fiber cable Step 2 Push the fiber cable down into the fiber boot Figure 17 9 shows the fiber boot attachment Figure 17 9 Attaching a Fiber Boot Step 3 Twist the fiber boot to lock the fiber cable into the tail end of the fiber boot Step 4 Slide the fiber boot forward along the fiber cable until the fiber boot fits snugly onto the end of the SC cable connector Step 5 Return to your o...

Страница 451: ...For Windows 2000 complete Step 5 For Windows XP complete Step 6 Step 3 If you have Windows 98 installed on your PC complete the following steps to change its TCP IP configuration a From the Windows Start menu choose Settings Control Panel b In the Control Panel dialog box click the Network icon c In the Network dialog box choose TCP IP for your network interface card NIC then click Properties d In...

Страница 452: ...choose TCP IP Protocol then click Properties d Click the IP Address tab e In the IP Address window click Specify an IP address f In the IP Address field enter an IP address that is identical to the ONS 15454 SDH IP address except for the last octet The last octet must be 1 or 3 through 254 g In the Subnet Mask field type 255 255 255 0 h Click Advanced i From the Gateways List click Add The TCP IP ...

Страница 453: ...t be 1 or 3 through 254 e In the Subnet Mask field type 255 255 255 0 f In the Default Gateway field type the ONS 15454 SDH IP address g Click OK h In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box click OK i In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box click Close Step 7 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D51 Set Up a Windows PCfor Craft Connection to an ONS 15454 SDH Using Dynamic H...

Страница 454: ...ration a From the Windows Start menu choose Settings Control Panel b In the Control Panel dialog box click the Network icon c In the Network dialog box select TCP IP for your NIC then click Properties d In the TCP IP Properties dialog box click the DNS Configuration tab and choose Disable DNS e Click the WINS Configuration tab and choose Disable WINS Resolution f Click the IP Address tab g In the ...

Страница 455: ... dialog box click Close Step 6 If you have Windows XP installed on your PC complete the following steps a From the Windows Start menu choose Control Panel Network Connections Note If the Network Connections menu item is not available click Switch to Classic View b In the Network Connections dialog box click Local Area Connection c In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box click Properties d I...

Страница 456: ...ows 2000 complete Step 5 For Windows XP complete Step 6 Step 3 If you have Windows 98 installed on your PC complete the following steps to change its TCP IP configuration a From the Windows Start menu choose Settings Control Panel b In the Control Panel dialog box click the Network icon c In the Network dialog box select TCP IP for your NIC then click Properties d In the TCP IP Properties dialog b...

Страница 457: ...e Control Panel dialog box click the Network icon c In the Network dialog box click the Protocols tab choose TCP IP Protocol then click Properties d Click the IP Address tab e In the IP Address window click Specify an IP address f In the IP Address field enter any legitimate IP address other than the node IP address Note You can suppress the LCD IP address display using CTC For more information se...

Страница 458: ...n your PC complete the following steps a From the Windows Start menu choose Control Panel Network Connections Note If the Network Connections menu is not available click Switch to Classic View b From the Network Connections dialog box click the Local Area Connection icon c From the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box choose Internet Protocol TCP IP then click Properties d In the IP Address...

Страница 459: ...us SIOCGLIFFLAGS hme1 no such interface If a message similar to this one appears go to Step 3 Step 3 Plumb the interface by typing ifconfig device plumb For example ifconfig hme1 plumb Step 4 Configure the IP address on the interface by typing ifconfig interface ip address netmask netmask up For example ifconfig hme0 192 1 0 3 netmask 255 255 255 0 up Note Enter an IP address that is identical to ...

Страница 460: ...5454 SDH with a default IP address of 192 1 0 2 type ping 192 1 0 2 If your workstation is connected to the ONS 15454 SDH the following message appears IP address is alive Note Skip this step if you checked Craft Access Only at Provisioning Network General Gateway Settings d If CTC is not responding a Request timed out Windows or a no answer from x x x x UNIX message appears Verify the IP and subn...

Страница 461: ...ke sure you are in Classic View before continuing with this procedure Step 2 In the Control Panel window choose Internet Options Step 3 In the Internet Properties dialog box click Connections LAN Settings Step 4 In the LAN Settings dialog box complete one of the following tasks Uncheck Use a proxy server to disable the service Purpose This task removes a node from a specified login node group To r...

Страница 462: ...ox under Category choose Advanced Proxies Step 4 In the right side of the Preferences dialog box under Proxies complete one of the following options Choose Direct connection to the Internet to bypass the proxy server Choose Manual proxy configuration to add exceptions to the proxy server then click View In the Manual Proxy Configuration dialog box under Exceptions enter the IP addresses of the ONS...

Страница 463: ...it is possible that UNIX could run out of colors to use for CTC The install and ncols 32 command line options limit the number of colors that Netscape uses Step 2 In the Netscape or Internet Explorer web address URL field enter the ONS 15454 SDH IP address For initial setup use the default address 192 1 0 2 This IP address appears on the LCD You can suppress the LCD IP address display using CTC Fo...

Страница 464: ...NS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide If a Java Plug in Security Warning dialog box appears complete the DLP D420 Install the Public Key Security Certificate task on page 21 1 to install the public key security certificate required by Software Release 4 1 and later After you complete the security certificate dialog box or if the certificate is already installed a Java Console window displays the CTC ...

Страница 465: ...box to view only the ONS 15454 SDH and login node group members if any entered in the Node Name field Nodes linked to this node through DCCs are not discovered and will not appear in CTC network view Using this option can decrease the CTC startup time in networks with many DCC connected nodes and reduces memory consumption Disable Circuit Management Check this box to disable discovery of existing ...

Страница 466: ...Login dialog box For example in Figure 17 11 a login node group is created that contains the IP addresses for Nodes 1 4 and 5 During login if you select this group from the Additional Nodes list and Disable Network Discovery is not selected all nodes in the figure appear If Test Group and Disable Network Discovery are both selected Nodes 1 4 and 5 appear You can create as many login groups as you ...

Страница 467: ...rs on the network view map Step 5 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D64 Set the IP Address Default Router and Network Mask Using the LCD Note You cannot perform this task if the LCD IP Display on the node view Provisioning Network tab is set to Display Only or Suppress Display See the DLP D249 Provision IP Settings task on page 19 52 to view or change the LCD IP Display field Purpose Th...

Страница 468: ...ddress Figure 17 13 the node subnet mask length or the default router IP address Figure 17 13 Changing the IP Address Step 4 Push the Slot button to move to the IP address or subnet mask digit that you need to change The selected digit flashes Tip The Slot Status and Port button positions correspond to the command position on the LCD For example in Figure 17 13 you press the Slot button to invoke ...

Страница 469: ...ration or press Port to cancel the configuration Saving the new configuration causes the TCC2 TCC2P cards to reboot During the reboot a Saving Changes TCC Reset message displays on the LCD The LCD returns to the normal alternating display after the TCC2 TCC2P reboot is complete see Table 19 4 on page 19 55 for reboot behavior Note The IP address and default router must be configured to be on the s...

Страница 470: ...ters You cannot change this value Next Hop Enter the IP address of the router port or the node IP address if the CTC computer is connected to the node directly Cost Enter the number of hops between the ONS 15454 SDH and the computer Step 4 Click OK Verify that the static route appears in the Static Route window Note Static route networking examples are provided in the Management Network Connectivi...

Страница 471: ...istrator Step 3 Click Apply Step 4 When the Change Network Configuration message appears click Yes Both TCC2 TCC2P cards reboot one at a time The reboot takes approximately 15 minutes See Table 19 4 on page 19 55 Step 5 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D68 Provision the IIOP Listener Port on the CTC Computer Step 1 In node view from the Edit menu choose Preferences Purpose This task se...

Страница 472: ...ector is labeled as Timing A and Timing B Step 1 In CTC node view click the Provisioning Timing General tabs Step 2 In the General Timing area complete the following information Timing Mode Choose External if the ONS 15454 SDH derives its timing from a MIC C T P FMEC choose Line if timing is derived from an STM N card non DWDM node or OSC card DWDM node that is optically connected to the timing no...

Страница 473: ...ot 5 as Reference 1 Timing Mode set to Mixed Both BITS and optical cards are available allowing you to set a mixture of external BITS and optical trunk span cards as timing references BITS 1 Out BITS 2 Out Define the timing references for equipment connected to the Timing A Out or Timing B Out FMEC connector Normally Timing Out is used with line nodes so the options displayed are the working optic...

Страница 474: ... equipment is not attached to the BITS output pins set the BITS Out State to locked Step 9 If the BITS Out State is set to locked continue with Step 10 If BITS Out State is set to unlocked complete the following information Coding Choose the coding used by your BITS reference either HDB3 or AMI If you selected 2 MHz the coding option is disabled Framing Choose the framing used by your BITS referen...

Страница 475: ...nal Clock BITS 1 Out BITS 2 Out Set to None Step 4 Click Apply Step 5 Click the Provisioning Timing BITS Facilities tabs Step 6 In the BITS Facilities area enter the following information E1 2 MHz Choose E1 or 2 MHz depending on the signal supported in your market E1 or 2 MHz are physical signal modes used to transmit the external clock from a GPS for example to BITS BITS In State Set BITS 1 and B...

Страница 476: ...pears under Available Cards If no cards are available no cards appear If this occurs you can not complete this task until you install the physical cards or preprovision the ONS 15454 SDH slots using the DLP D442 Preprovision a Slot task on page 21 33 Step 5 From the Available Cards list choose the card that will be protected by the card selected in the Protect Card drop down list Click the top arr...

Страница 477: ...down list Protect Card Choose the protect card from the drop down list If these cards are not installed no cards appear in the drop down list After you choose the protect card a list of cards available for protection appear under Available Cards If no cards are available no cards appear If no cards are available you cannot complete this task until you install the physical cards or preprovision the...

Страница 478: ...rts If STM N cards are not installed no ports appear in the drop down list After you choose the protect port a list of ports available for protection appear under Available Ports If no cards are available no ports appear If this occurs you cannot complete this task until you install the physical cards or preprovision the ONS 15454 SDH slots using the DLP D442 Preprovision a Slot task on page 21 33...

Страница 479: ...ally switches to the protect port of the 1 1 protection group DLP D74 Create a New User on a Single Node Step 1 In node view click the Provisioning Security Users tabs Step 2 In the Security window click Create Step 3 In the Create User dialog box enter the following Name Type the user name The name must be a minimum of six and a maximum of 20 alphanumeric a z A Z 0 9 characters Password Type the ...

Страница 480: ...numeric a z A Z 0 9 characters Password Type the user password The password must be a minimum of six and a maximum of 20 alphanumeric a z A Z 0 9 and special characters where at least two characters are nonalphabetic and at least one character is a special character Confirm Password Type the password again to confirm it Security Level Choose a security level for the user RETRIEVE MAINTENANCE PROVI...

Страница 481: ... to VCAT circuits with a source or destination on an ML Series or FC_MR 4 line rate mode card Step 1 In node or network view click the Circuits tab Step 2 Click the VCAT circuit that you want to edit then click Edit Step 3 Click the Members tab Step 4 Click Add Member The Add Member button is enabled if the VCAT circuit has sufficient bandwidth for an added member Step 5 Define the number of membe...

Страница 482: ...er Choose a number from the drop down list to identify the member Name Enter a unique name to identify the member The name can be alphanumeric and up to 48 characters including spaces If you leave the field blank CTC assigns a default name to the circuit Protection Choose the member protection type Fully Protected Routes the circuit on a protected path Unprotected Creates an unprotected circuit PC...

Страница 483: ...cuit route Green arrows indicate spans that you can add Click a span arrowhead then click Include to include the span or Remove to remove the span c If the provisioned circuit does not reflect the routing and configuration you want click Back to verify and change circuit information Step 12 Click Finish Note Adding members to a VCAT circuit might take several minutes depending on the complexity of...

Страница 484: ...your originating procedure NTP DLP D78 Install the TL1 Craft Interface on the MIC C T P Note If you prefer you can use the LAN connection port on the TCC2 TCC2P card instead of the LAN connection port on the MIC C T P Use either the MIC C T P connection or the TCC2 TCC2P card connection You cannot use the LAN connection port on the MIC C T P and the LAN connection port on the TCC2 TCC2P card simul...

Страница 485: ...m the Additional Nodes drop down list Step 4 Click the Login button Step 5 Click the Circuits tab All internode circuits are shown as PARTIAL Step 6 Refer to the diagram or CTC printout you created in the NTP D213 Remove an MS SPRing Node procedure on page 14 7 or the NTP D106 Remove an SNCP Node procedure on page 14 12 Find the circuits on the line cards of the removed node Table 17 2 TL1 Pin Ass...

Страница 486: ...d automaticInService or Locked enabled Maintenance service states For non LCAS VCAT members the Out of Group VCAT state is the Locked enabled disabled service state Step 1 In node or network view click the Circuits tab Step 2 Click the VCAT circuit that you want to edit then click Edit Step 3 Click the Members tab Step 4 Select the member that you want to change To choose multiple members press Ct...

Страница 487: ... connects in the Locked enabled outOfGroup service state This administrative state is used to put a member circuit out of the group and to stop sending traffic Step 7 Click Apply Step 8 To close the Edit Circuit window choose Close from the File menu Step 9 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D81 Provision a Proxy Tunnel Note If the proxy server is disabled you cannot set up a proxy tunne...

Страница 488: ...rn to your originating procedure NTP DLP D82 View Alarms Step 1 In card node or network view click the Alarms tab to view the alarms for that card node or network Figure 17 16 Figure 17 16 CTC Node View Table 17 3 lists the columns in the Alarms window and their descriptions Purpose Use this to view current alarms on a card node or network Tools Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP D60 Log i...

Страница 489: ...med object is located Visible in network view Slot Network and node view only If an alarm is raised on a card the slot where the alarm occurred Port If an alarm is raised on a card the port where the alarm is raised for STSTerm and VTTerm the port refers to the upstream card it is partnered with Path Width Indicates how many STSs are contained in the alarmed path This information complements the a...

Страница 490: ...ndard either Mu_Law North America Japan or A_Law Europe The provisioning procedures are the same for both types of orderwire Caution When provisioning orderwire for ONS 15454 SDHs residing in a ring do not provision a complete orderwire loop For example a four node ring typically has east and west ports provisioned at all four nodes However to prevent orderwire loops provision two orderwire ports ...

Страница 491: ...3 Review the information on the Change Secure Mode wizard page then click Next Step 4 On the TCC Ethernet Port page enter the IP address and subnet mask for the TCC2P LAN TCP IP port The IP address cannot reside on the same subnet as the MIC C T P LAN port nor the ONS 15454 SDH default router Step 5 Click Next Step 6 On the MIC C T P Ethernet Port page modify the MIC C T P IP address subnet mask a...

Страница 492: ...to network view and the CTC Alerts dialog box appears In network view the node changes to grey and a DISCONNECTED condition appears Step 10 In the CTC Alerts dialog box click Close Wait for the reboot to finish This might take several minutes Step 11 After the DISCONNECTED condition clears complete the following steps to suppress the MIC C T P IP address from display in CTC and the LCD If you do n...

Страница 493: ...15454 SDH security mode When security mode is locked two IP addresses must always be provisioned for the node one for the TCC2P LAN TCP IP port and one for the MIC C T P LAN port Tools Equipment TCC2P cards must be installed Prerequisite Procedures DLP D60 Log into CTC page 17 49 DLP D84 Enable Node Security Mode page 17 77 Required As Needed As needed Onsite Remote Onsite or remote Security Level...

Страница 494: ...e will reboot after you complete this task causing a temporary disconnection between the CTC computer and the node Step 1 Click the Provisioning Security Data Comm tabs Step 2 Click Change Mode Step 3 Review the information on the Change Secure Mode wizard page then click Next Step 4 On the Node IP Address page choose the address you want to assign to the node MIC C T P Ethernet Port Assigns the M...

Страница 495: ...changes to grey and a DISCONNECTED condition appears Step 8 In the CTC Alerts dialog box click Close Wait for the reboot to finish This might take several minutes Step 9 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D88 Optical 1 1 Protection Test Step 1 From the View menu choose Go to Network View Step 2 Click the Alarms tab a Verify that the alarm filter is not on See the DLP D227 Disable Alarm F...

Страница 496: ...ng port a Next to Switch Commands click Clear b In the Confirm Clear Operation dialog box click Yes Step 8 Switch the protect port a In the Selected Group area click the protect port b Next to Switch Commands click the Force button c In the Confirm Force Operation dialog box click Yes d In the Selected Group area verify that the following text appears Protect port Protect Active FORCE_SWITCH_TO_WO...

Страница 497: ...his task provisions the K3 byte Do not remap the K3 byte unless it is specifically required to run an ONS 15454 SDH MS SPRing through third party equipment This task is unnecessary for most users Tools Equipment STM 16 cards must be installed on the MS SPRing span that you will remap Prerequisite Procedures DLP D60 Log into CTC page 17 49 Required As Needed As needed Onsite Remote Onsite or remote...

Страница 498: ...iew Step 2 Click the Provisioning MS SPRing tabs Step 3 Click the row of the MS SPRing you will switch then click Edit Step 4 Initiate a Force Ring switch on the west port a Right click any MS SPRing node west port and choose Set West Protection Operation To move a graphic icon click it then press Ctrl while you drag and drop it to a new location Note For two fiber MS SPRings the squares on the no...

Страница 499: ...ndition is reported against the working span on the west side of the node Step 8 Optional If you remapped the K3 byte to run an ONS 15454 MS SPRing through third party equipment check the following condition Verify a KBYTE PASSTHRU condition reported on other nodes that are not connected to the west side of the node where you invoked the Force Ring switch Step 9 Verify the MS SPRing line status on...

Страница 500: ... the Set East Protection Operation dialog box choose FORCE RING from the drop down list a Click OK b Click Yes in the two Confirm MS SPRing Operation dialog boxes that appear On the network view graphic an F appears on the working MS SPRing channel where you invoked the Force Ring switch The MS SPRing span lines are purple where the Force was invoked and all span lines between other MS SPRing node...

Страница 501: ...xplained alarms appear on the network If unexplained alarms appear resolve them before continuing Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide Step 24 Display the MS SPRing window where you invoked the Force Ring switch the window might be hidden by the CTC window Step 25 Clear the Force Ring switch on the east port a Right click the west port of the MS SPRing node where you invoked the ...

Страница 502: ... tab then click Retrieve Step 6 Verify the following conditions EXERCISING SPAN An Exercise Ring Successful condition is reported on the node where the span was exercised FE EX SPAN A Far End Exercise Span Request condition is reported against the east span of the node connected to the west side of the node where you exercised the span KB PASSTHR If applicable a K Byte Pass Though Active condition...

Страница 503: ...ected to the west side of the node where you exercised the span KB PASSTHR If applicable a K Byte Pass Though Active condition is reported Note Make sure the Filter button in the lower right corner of the window is off Click the Node column to sort conditions by node Step 12 Click the Alarms tab a Verify that the alarm filter is not on See the DLP D227 Disable Alarm Filtering task on page 19 25 as...

Страница 504: ...condition is reported on the node where you invoked the Force switch and a SPAN SW EAST Span Switch East condition is reported on the node connected to the west line of the node where you performed the switch Make sure the Filter button in the lower right corner of window is off Step 6 Click the Alarms tab a Verify that the alarm filter is not on See the DLP D227 Disable Alarm Filtering task on pa...

Страница 505: ...k on page 19 25 as necessary b Verify that no unexplained alarms appear on the network If unexplained alarms appear resolve them before continuing Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide if necessary Step 12 Display the MS SPRing window where you invoked the Force Span switch the window might be hidden by the CTC window Step 13 Clear the switch on the east span a Right click the eas...

Страница 506: ...e showing which circuits are active on the span Step 3 Initiate the span switch a Click the Perform SNCP span switching field and choose FORCE SWITCH AWAY from the drop down list b Click Apply c In the Confirm SNCP Switch dialog box click Yes d In the Protection Switch Result dialog box click OK In the Circuits on Span dialog box the Switch State for all circuits is Force Unprotected circuits will...

Страница 507: ...M N card to map the VC12 to a VC4 for optical transport Figure 17 17 Defining the Circuit Source on an E1 N 14 Card Step 3 Choose the port from the Port drop down list Step 4 E1 42 card only From the TUG3 drop down list choose the source TUG3 Purpose This task provisions an electrical or optical circuit source and destination for a low order VC12 circuit Tools Equipment None Prerequisite Procedure...

Страница 508: ...h in Use error and is unable to complete the circuit The user with the incomplete circuit needs to choose new destination parameters Step 12 If you need to create a secondary destination for example an SNCP ring bridge selector circuit exit point in a multivendor SNCP ring click Use Secondary Destination and repeat Steps 9 through 11 to define the secondary destination Step 13 Click Next Step 14 R...

Страница 509: ...der card where the circuit will originate If a card s capacity is fully utilized it does not appear in the list Step 3 Depending on the circuit origination card choose the source port and or VC 4 from the Port and VC 4 drop down lists The Port drop down list is only available if the card has multiple ports VC 4s are not shown if they are already in use by other circuits Note The VC4s that appear d...

Страница 510: ...p 9 If you need to create a secondary destination for example an SNCP ring bridge selector circuit entry point in a multivendor SNCP ring click Use Secondary Destination and repeat Steps 6 through 8 to define the secondary destination Step 10 Click Next Step 11 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D98 Provision a High Order Circuit Route Step 1 In Route Review Edit area of the Circuit Crea...

Страница 511: ...e source to the destination node through all intermediary nodes If Fully Protect Path is checked in the Circuit Routing Preferences area you must Add two spans for each SNCP ring or unprotected portions of the circuit route from the source to the destination Add one span for each MS SPRing or 1 1 portions of route from the source to the destination Add primary spans for each MS SPRing from the sou...

Страница 512: ...circuits that you will create Caution Multiple E Series Ethernet circuits with spanning tree enabled block each other if the circuits traverse the same E Series Ethernet card and use the same VLAN Step 5 Return to your originating procedure NTP Purpose This task verifies that the network has the capacity to support the additional new VLANs required for the creation of E Series circuits It does not...

Страница 513: ...l Tunnel Step 1 Click the Provisioning Network Firewall tabs Step 2 Click the firewall tunnel that you want to delete Purpose This task removes a proxy tunnel Tools Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP D60 Log into CTC page 17 49 Required As Needed As needed Onsite Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Superuser Purpose This task removes a firewall tunnel Tools Equipment None Prerequisite P...

Страница 514: ...te drop down list and select Locked maintenance Click Apply Step 3 Click Yes in the Action may be service affecting Are you sure dialog box Step 4 The service state of the card becomes Locked enabled loopback maintenance The card s faceplate appears blue in Cisco Transport Controller CTC and the SRV LED turns amber Step 5 Right click the card to reveal a shortcut menu Step 6 Click Hard reset Card ...

Страница 515: ...l the fiber clip before or after the fibers are attached to the 15454_MRC 12 card Step 1 Determine the correct clip to use Use the short clip with a standard cabinet door and a long clip with an extended door Step 2 Insert the prong of the fiber clip into the rectangular cutout on the sloped face of the faceplate Figure 18 1 Purpose This procedure soft resets the CE100T 8 card Tools Equipment None...

Страница 516: ... 1 Installing the Fiber Clip Step 3 Push the clip into the hole until the locking tab snaps the clip securely into place To remove a fiber clip push on the locking tab to release the clip while rotating the clip forward and up Step 4 Return to your originating procedure NTP Locking Tab Fiber Clip Long Fiber Clip Short Fiber Clip Faceplate hole 137638 ...

Страница 517: ...ttribute VSA needs to be specified when adding users to the RADIUS server shell priv lvl N where N is 0 for Retrieve user 1 for Maintenance user 2 for Provisioning user 3 for Superuser Step 1 In node view click the Provisioning Security RADIUS Server tabs Figure 18 2 Purpose This task allows you to configure a node for Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS authentication RADIUS validat...

Страница 518: ...RADIUS server you must add the ENEs to the RADIUS server individually for authentication If you do not add the ENE node to a RADIUS server prior to activating RADIUS authentication no user will be able to access the node Refer to the User Guide for Cisco Secure ACS for Windows Server for more information about adding a node to a RADIUS server Step 4 Enter the shared secret in the Shared Secret fie...

Страница 519: ...ck the Enable the Node as the Final Authenticator check box if you want the node to be the final autheticator This means that if every RADIUS authenticator is unavailable the node will authenticate the login rather than locking the user out Step 14 Click Apply to save all changes or Reset to clear all changes Step 15 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D106 View and Terminate Active Login...

Страница 520: ...ns appear resolve them before continuing Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide c Complete the DLP D147 Export CTC Data task on page 18 38 to export alarm and condition information Step 2 In node view double click the card where you want to provision PPM settings Step 3 Click the Provisioning Pluggable Port Modules tabs Step 4 In the Pluggable Port Modules area click Create The Create ...

Страница 521: ...ge Line Settings for STM N Cards Note For the default values and domains of user provisionable card settings refer to the Network Element Defaults appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Step 1 In node view double click the STM N card where you want to change the line settings Step 2 Click the Provisioning Line tabs Step 3 Modify any of the settings listed in Table 18 1 Step 4 Click A...

Страница 522: ...e In Enables synchronization status messages SSMs S1 byte which allow the node to choose the best timing source Yes No Send FF DoNotUse When checked sends a special DUS 0xff message on the S1 byte Yes No Admin SSM In Overrides the synchronization traceability unknown STU value default setting You cannot select Admin SSM In if Sync Message In is enabled on the STM N card G811 G812T G812L SETS DUS M...

Страница 523: ...te For more information about service states refer to the Administrative and Service States appendix of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Unlocked enabled The port is fully operational and performing as provisioned Unlocked disabled automaticInService The port is out of service but traffic is carried Alarm reporting is suppressed The ONS node monitors the ports for an error free signal Afte...

Страница 524: ...the hardware The options that appear in the drop down list depend on the card SR short reach up to 2 km distance SR 1 up to 2 km distance IR 1 intermediate reach up to 15 km distance IR 2 up to 40 km distance LR 1 long reach up to 40 km distance LR 2 up to 80 km distance LR 3 up to 80 km distance Wavelength Does not apply to all cards Allows you to provision the wavelength frequency First Tunable ...

Страница 525: ...nt minimum Default 15 min 1 day 50 percent LBC HIGH Laser bias current maximum Default 15 min 1 day 150 percent OPT LOW Optical power transmitted minimum Default 15 min 1 day 80 percent OPT HIGH Optical power transmitted maximum Default 15 min 1 day 120 percent OPR LOW Optical power received minimum Default 15 min 1 day 50 percent OPR HIGH Optical power received maximum Default 15 min 1 day 200 pe...

Страница 526: ... buttons next to the Maximum History Entries field to change the entry Step 3 Click Apply and OK Note Setting the Maximum History Entries value to the high end of the range uses more CTC memory and could impair CTC performance Purpose This task changes the maximum number of session entries included in the alarm history Use this task to extend the history list in order to save information for futur...

Страница 527: ... click the Alarms tab Step 2 Click Synchronize This button causes CTC to retrieve a current alarm summary for the card node or network This step is optional because CTC updates the Alarms window automatically as raise clear messages arrive from the node Purpose This task changes the time stamp for events to the time zone of the ONS node reporting the alarm By default the events time stamp is set t...

Страница 528: ...b Step 2 Click Retrieve Figure 18 5 The Retrieve button requests the current set of fault conditions from the node card or network The window is not updated when events change on the node You must click Retrieve to see any changes Purpose Use this task to view conditions events with a Not Reported NR severity at the card node or network level The Conditions tab gives you a clear record of changes ...

Страница 529: ...ot reported due to exclusion or suppression are shown as NR in the Conditions window Current conditions are shown with the severity chosen in the alarm profile if used For more information about alarm profiles see the NTP D71 Create Download and Assign Alarm Severity Profiles procedure on page 9 6 Note When a port is placed in the Locked enabled maintenance service state it raises an Alarms Suppre...

Страница 530: ...rm will appear Step 4 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D117 Apply Alarm Profiles to Cards and Nodes Step 1 In node view click the Provisioning Alarm Profiles Alarm Profile Editor tab Figure 18 6 Figure 18 6 Node View Alarm Profile Step 2 To apply profiles to a card a Click the Profile row for the card Purpose This task applies a custom or default alarm profile to cards or nodes Tools E...

Страница 531: ... Path Performance Monitoring page 18 21 Step 2 In node view double click the STM N card that you want to monitor The card view appears See Table 18 3 for a list of STM N line terminating equipment LTE cards Purpose This task enables pointer justification counts which provide a way to align the phase variations in VC4 payloads and to monitor the clock synchronization between nodes A consistent larg...

Страница 532: ...d drop down list Figure 18 7 Enabling or Disabling Pointer Justification Count Parameters Step 5 In the Service State field confirm that the port is in the Unlocked enabled service state Step 6 If the port is Unlocked enabled click Apply If the port is out of service Locked enabled disabled Locked enabled maintenance Unlocked disabled automaticInService choose Unlocked in the Admin State drop down...

Страница 533: ...ng procedure NTP DLP D122 Enable Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring Note The monitored IPPM parameters are P EB P BBE P ES P SES and P UAS For more information about IPPM parameters refer to the Performance Monitoring chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Step 1 In node view double click the STM N card you want to monitor The card view appears See Table 18 3 on page 18 19 for a...

Страница 534: ...nd make a selection based on the following rules Unchecked means that IPPM is disabled for that VC4 default Checked means that IPPM is enabled for that VC4 Step 4 Click Apply Step 5 Click the Performance tab to view PM parameters For IPPM parameter definitions refer to the Performance Monitoring chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Step 6 Return to your originating procedure NTP VC4...

Страница 535: ...ute intervals Note If a complete 15 minute interval count is not possible the value appears with a yellow background An incomplete or incorrect count can be caused by monitoring for less than 15 minutes after the counter started changing node timing settings changing the time zone settings replacing a card resetting a card or changing port states When the problem is corrected the subsequent 15 min...

Страница 536: ...ter started changing node timing settings changing the time zone settings replacing a card resetting a card or changing port states When the problem is corrected the subsequent 1 day interval appears with a white background Step 7 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D126 View Near End PM Counts Step 1 In node view double click the card where you want to view PM counts The card view appear...

Страница 537: ...Performance tab Step 3 Click Baseline The Baseline button clears the PM counts displayed in the current time interval but does not clear the PM counts on the card When the current time interval expires or the window view changes the total number of PM counts on the card and on the window appear in the appropriate column The baseline values are discarded if you change views to a different window an...

Страница 538: ...rk or Node in the Scope drop down list Step 4 Click Search Step 5 In the Circuit Name Search dialog box complete the following Find What Enter the text of the circuit name you want to find Match Whole Word Only Check this check box to instruct CTC to select circuits only if the entire word matches the text in the Find What field Match Case Check this check box to instruct CTC to select circuits on...

Страница 539: ...at the PPM appears in the list in the Pluggable Port Modules area If it does not repeat Steps 4 through 5 Step 7 Repeat the task to provision a second PPM Step 8 Click OK Step 9 Continue with the DLP D133 Provision the Optical Line Rate on the MRC 12 Card task on page 18 27 to provision the line rate Step 10 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D133 Provision the Optical Line Rate on the M...

Страница 540: ...ts area turns light blue until the actual SFP is installed and then the row turns white Step 8 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D134 Change the Optical Line Rate on the MRC 12 Card Step 1 In node view double click the MRC 12 card where you want to provision PPM settings Step 2 Click the Provisioning Pluggable Port Modules tabs Step 3 Click the port with the port rate you want to change...

Страница 541: ...ds page 11 5 NTP D287 Modify and Delete Circuits page 7 4 NTP D288 Modify and Delete Overhead Circuits and Server Trails page 7 4 DLP D214 Change the Service State for a Port page 19 10 Step 2 In node view double click the MRC 12 or STM64 XFP card where you want to delete PPM settings Step 3 Click the Provisioning Pluggable Port Modules tabs Step 4 To delete a PPM and the associated ports a Click ...

Страница 542: ...e If you want to label the port enter the port name Note Circuit table displays port name of the POS port and not the Ethernet port Admin State Choose Unlocked to put the port in service Expected Speed Choose the expected speed of the device that is or will be attached to the Ethernet port If you know the speed choose 100 Mbps or 10 Mbps to match the attached device If you do not know the speed ch...

Страница 543: ...oS value This results in all traffic being sent to the best effort queue by default Note Untagged traffic is treated as best effort Note If traffic is tagged with both CoS and IP ToS then the CoS value is used unless the CoS value is 7 Step 4 Click Apply Step 5 Refresh the Ethernet statistics a Click the Performance Ether Ports Statistics tabs b Click Refresh Note Reprovisioning an Ethernet port o...

Страница 544: ...de drop down list Auto Uses the first string received from the port at the other path trace end as the current expected string An alarm is raised when a string that differs from the baseline is received For STM N ports Auto is recommended because Manual mode requires you to trace the circuit on the Edit Circuit window to determine whether the port is the source or destination path Manual Uses the ...

Страница 545: ... NTP SNTP Server Time Date M D Y Time Time H M S Time Time Zone Time Use Daylight Saving Time See the NTP D316 Set Up Name Date Time and Contact Information procedure on page 4 4 for detailed field descriptions Step 3 Click Apply Confirm that the changes appear if not repeat the task Step 4 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D141 Provision CE 100T 8 and CE 1000 4 POS Ports Prerequisite P...

Страница 546: ... framing the default or HDLC POS framing The framing type needs to match the framing type of the POS device at the end of the SONET circuit Encap CRC With GFP F framing the user can configure a 32 bit cyclic redundancy check CRC the default or none no CRC HDLC framing provides a set 32 bit CRC The CRC should be set to match the CRC of the POS device on the end of the SONET circuit Note For more de...

Страница 547: ... a Static Route Step 1 In node view click the Provisioning Network Static Routing tabs Step 2 Click the static route you want to delete Step 3 Click Delete A confirmation dialog box appears Step 4 Click Yes Step 5 Return to your originating procedure NTP Prerequisite Procedures DLP D60 Log into CTC page 17 49 DLP D65 Create a Static Route page 17 56 Required As Needed As needed Onsite Remote Onsit...

Страница 548: ... From the View menu choose Go to Network View Step 2 If you want to change a domain background double click the domain If not continue with Step 3 Step 3 Right click the network view or domain map area and choose Set Background Color from the shortcut menu Step 4 In the Choose Color dialog box select a background color Step 5 Click OK Purpose This task disables the Open Shortest Path First OSPF ro...

Страница 549: ... only history items appearing in the window This option is available for all windows Table Contents Prints CTC data in table format without graphical representations of shelves cards or tabs This option does not apply to Provisioning General General and Power Monitor windows Provisioning Network General window Provisioning Security Policy Access and Legal Disclaimer windows Provisioning SNMP windo...

Страница 550: ...e identical except that the network view does not contain an Inventory tab or a Performance tab Figure 18 9 Selecting CTC Data For Print Step 4 Click OK Step 5 In the Windows Print dialog box click a printer and click OK Step 6 Repeat this task for each window that you want to print Step 7 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D147 Export CTC Data Step 1 Click the tab containing the informa...

Страница 551: ...t window As TSV Saves the CTC table as tab separated values TSV Figure 18 10 Selecting CTC Data For Export Step 5 If you want to open a file in a text editor or word processor application procedures vary Typically you can use the File Open command to view the CTC data or you can double click the file name and choose an application such as Notepad Text editor and word processor applications format ...

Страница 552: ...or CSV files Filename tsv for TSV files Step 9 Navigate to a directory where you want to store the file Step 10 Click OK Step 11 Repeat the task for each window that you want to export Step 12 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D148 Create Domain Icons Note Domains created by one user are visible to all users who log into the network Note To allow users of any security level to create lo...

Страница 553: ... removed node icons are visible to all users who log into the network Note To allow users of any security level to create local domains that is domains that are visible on the home CTC session only superusers can change the CTC network LocalDomainCreationAndViewing NE default value to TRUE A TRUE value means any user can maintain the domain information in his or her Preferences file meaning domain...

Страница 554: ...con Move a node from a domain to the network map Open the domain and right click a node Choose Move Node Back to Parent View Open a domain Complete one of the following Double click the domain icon Right click the domain and choose Open Domain Return to network view Right click the domain view area and choose Go to Parent View from the shortcut menu Preview domain contents Right click the domain i...

Страница 555: ... the Provisioning SNMP tabs Step 2 In the Trap Destinations area click Create Step 3 In the Create SNMP Trap Destination dialog box complete the following fields Destination IP Address Enter the IP address of your network management system NMS Community Enter the SNMP community name For more information about SNMP refer to the SNMP chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Note The commu...

Страница 556: ...odify a 1 N Protection Group Step 1 Verify that the E1 N 14 and DS3i N 12 cards are installed according to the 1 N specifications in the DLP D72 Create a 1 N Protection Group task on page 17 63 Step 2 In node view click the Provisioning Protection tabs Step 3 In the Protection Groups area click the 1 N protection group you want to modify Step 4 In the Selected Group area change any of the followin...

Страница 557: ...ty name assigned to the ONS 15454 SDH is case sensitive and must match the community name of the NMS UDP Port The default UDP port for SNMP traps is 162 Trap Version Choose either SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 Refer to your NMS documentation to determine whether to use SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 Step 4 Click OK The node IP address of the node where you provisioned the new trap destination appears in the Trap Destination...

Страница 558: ...munity names in the fields for Relay and Relay C When doing this consult the following guidelines If the NE is directly connected to the GNE enter the address and community name of the GNE for Relay A If this NE is connected to the GNE through other NEs enter the address and community name of the GNE for Relay A and the address and community name of NE 1 for Relay B and NE 2 for Relay C The SNMP p...

Страница 559: ...0 minutes This is the amount of time that will elapse before the traffic reverts to the working card Traffic can revert when conditions causing the switch are cleared See the DLP D73 Create a 1 1 Protection Group task on page 17 64 for field descriptions Step 4 Click Apply Confirm that the changes appear if not repeat the task Step 5 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D155 Delete a Prote...

Страница 560: ...erences for the node and up to six BITS Out references BITS Out references define the timing references used by equipment that can be attached to the node s BITS pins on the MIC C T P If you attach equipment to BITS Out pins you normally attach it to a node with Line mode because equipment near the external timing reference can be directly wired to the reference NE Reference BITS 1 Out BITS 2 Out ...

Страница 561: ...view click the Provisioning Security Users tabs Step 2 Click the user whose settings you want to modify Step 3 Click Change Step 4 In the Change User dialog box you can Change the existing user password Change the existing user security level Lock out the user See the NTP D30 Create Users and Assign Security procedure on page 4 4 for fields and descriptions Step 5 Click OK Note User settings that ...

Страница 562: ...urity Users tabs Step 2 Choose the user you want to delete Step 3 Click Delete Step 4 In the Delete User dialog box verify that the user name displayed is the one you want to delete Step 5 Click OK Confirm that the changes appear if not repeat the task Step 6 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D160 Change User Password and Security Level on Multiple Nodes Note You must add the same user ...

Страница 563: ...ur originating procedure NTP DLP D161 Delete a User on Multiple Nodes Note You cannot delete a user who is currently logged in To log out a user you can complete the DLP D316 Log Out a User on Multiple Nodes task on page 20 8 or you can choose the Logout before delete option on the Delete User dialog box Note CTC will allow you to delete other Superuser only if at least one Superuser remains For e...

Страница 564: ...92 168 7 4 at Port 161 The outgoing PDU will have net7node4 as the community name This is the valid community name for the ENE with address 192 168 7 4 Formatted community string input example 2 allviews 192 168 7 99 enter7 192 168 9 6 161 net9node6 If allviews is a valid community name value at the proxy enabled GNE the GNE is expected to forward the PDU to 192 168 7 99 at the default port Port 1...

Страница 565: ...complete this task until you confirm the role of the node within the network It will be either an ES IS Level 1 or IS Level 1 Level 2 This decision must be carefully considered For additional information about OSI provisioning refer to the Management Network Connectivity chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Purpose This task deletes SNMP trap destinations on an ONS 15454 SDH Tools E...

Страница 566: ...es upon an intermediate system IS for communication with nodes that reside within its OSI area Note The End System routing mode is not available if more than one virtual router is enabled Intermediate System Level 1 The ONS 15454 SDH performs OSI IS functions It communicates with IS and ES nodes that reside within its OSI area It depends upon an IS L1 L2 node to communicate with IS and ES nodes th...

Страница 567: ...hin a Level 2 routing area The propagation occurs if the NE is not the target of the Type 2 PDU and PDUs are not propagated to the NE from which the PDU was received Note This parameter is only used when the Node Routing Area is provisioned to Intermediate System Level 1 Level 2 TARP PDUs Origination If checked default the node performs all TARP origination functions including TID to NSAP resoluti...

Страница 568: ...he NE The default setting is not enabled Type 4 PDU Delay Sets the amount of time that will pass before the Type 4 PDU is generated when Send Type 4 PDU on Startup is enabled 60 seconds is the default The range is 0 to 255 seconds Note The Send Type 4 PDU on Startup and Type 4 PDU Delay parameters are not used if TARP PDUs Origination is not enabled LDB Entry Sets the TARP loop detection buffer ti...

Страница 569: ...f used and then click OK to close the Add Static Entry dialog box Step 5 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D168 Remove a Static TID to NSAP Entry from the TARP Data Cache Step 1 In node view click the Provisioning OSI TARP Static TDC tabs Step 2 Click the static entry that you want to delete Step 3 Click Delete Static Entry Purpose This task adds a static TID to NSAP entry to the TDC Th...

Страница 570: ...1 PDUs Level 2 Indicates that the adjacency is in a different area than the current node The entry generates Type 2 PDUs NSAP Enter the OSI NSAP address in the NSAP field or if preferred click Use Mask and enter the address in the Masked NSAP Entry dialog box Step 4 Click OK to close the Masked NSAP Entry dialog box if used and then click OK to close the Add Static Entry dialog box Step 5 Return t...

Страница 571: ...it The OSI Router Editor dialog box appears Step 3 In the OSI Router Editor dialog box a Check Enable Router to enable the router and make its primary area address available for editing b Click the manual area address then click Edit c In the Edit Manual Area Address dialog box edit the primary area address in the Area Address field If you prefer click Use Mask and enter the edits in the Masked NS...

Страница 572: ... following dialog boxes Masked NSAP Entry if used Add Manual Area Address and OSI Router Editor Step 4 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D173 Enable the OSI Subnet on the LAN Interface Note OSI subnetwork points of attachment are enabled on data communications channels DCCs when you create DCCs See the DLP D363 Provision Regenerator Section DCC Terminations task on page 20 68 and the DL...

Страница 573: ...rmediate System Hello PDU propagation frequency Intermediate system NEs send ISHs to other ESs and ISs to inform them about the IS NETs it serves The default is 10 seconds The range is 10 to 1000 seconds IIH Sets the Intermediate System to Intermediate System Hello PDU propagation frequency The IS IS Hello PDUs establish and maintain adjacencies between ISs The default is 3 seconds The range is 1 ...

Страница 574: ...e not compatible Most Cisco routers support the Cisco IP tunnel while only a few support both GRE and Cisco IP tunnels You generally should create Cisco IP tunnels if you are tunneling between two Cisco routers or between a Cisco router and an ONS node Caution Always verify that the IP over CLNS tunnel type you choose is supported by the equipment at the other end of the tunnel IP Address Enter th...

Страница 575: ...1 N Protection Note This procedure assumes that E1 N 14 cards are installed in Slots 1 through 6 and or Slots 12 through 17 The E1 N 14 cards in Slots 3 and 15 are the protect cards Each protect card protects the other E1 N 14 cards in that half of the shelf The ONS 15454 SDH must run CTC Software Release 4 0 or later Step 1 In node view click the Maintenance Protection tabs Purpose This task remo...

Страница 576: ...e cards that you will move into the new protection group Step 8 Click Delete Step 9 When the confirmation dialog box appears click Yes Note Deleting the 1 1 protection group does not disrupt service However no protection bandwidth exists for the working circuits until you complete the 1 N protection procedure Therefore complete this procedure as quickly as possible Step 10 If needed repeat Steps 7...

Страница 577: ...hy the card cannot carry working traffic Step 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for each protection group that you need to convert Step 5 Verify that no standing alarms exist for any of the DS3i N 12 cards you are converting If alarms exist and you have difficulty clearing them contact your next level of support Step 6 Click the Provisioning Protection tabs Step 7 Click the 1 1 protection group that contains...

Страница 578: ...onal information about OSI provisioning refer to the Management Network Connectivity chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Caution LSP buffers must be the same at all NEs within the network or loss of visibility could occur Do not modify the LSP buffers unless you are sure that all NEs within the OSI have the same buffer size Caution LSP buffer sizes cannot be greater than the LAP D ...

Страница 579: ...tivity chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Step 4 Although Cisco does not recommend changing the LSP Link State Protocol Data Unit buffer sizes you can adjust the buffers in the following fields L1 LSP Buffer Size Adjusts the Level 1 link state PDU buffer size L2 LSP Buffer Size Adjusts the Level 2 link state PDU buffer size Step 5 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D179 ...

Страница 580: ... intermediate system NE sends ISHs to other ESs and ISs to inform them about the NETs it serves The default is 10 seconds The range is 10 to 1000 seconds IIH The Intermediate System to Intermediate System Hello PDU propagation frequency The IS IS Hello PDUs establish and maintain adjacencies between ISs The default is 3 seconds The range is 1 to 600 seconds Note The IS IS Cost and DIS Priority par...

Страница 581: ...only a few support both GRE and Cisco IP tunnels You generally should create Cisco IP tunnels if you are tunneling between two Cisco routers or between a Cisco router and an ONS node Caution Always verify that the IP over CLNS tunnel type you choose is supported by the equipment at the other end of the tunnel IP Address Enter the IP address of the IP over CLNS tunnel destination IP Mask Enter the ...

Страница 582: ...cess the destination address Subnet types include SDCC LDCC GCC OSC and LAN Location Indicates the OSI subnetwork point of attachment For DCC subnets the slot and port are displayed LAN subnets are shown as LAN Destination Address The destination NSAP of the IS Purpose This task allows you to delete an IP over CLNS tunnel Tools Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP D60 Log into CTC page 17 49...

Страница 583: ...interface For DCC subnets the slot and port are displayed LAN subnets are shown as LAN Destination Address The destination IS NSAP MAC Address For destination NEs that are accessed by LAN subnets the NE s MAC address Step 3 If additional routers are enabled you can view their RIBs by choosing the router number in the Router field and clicking Refresh Step 4 Return to your originating procedure NTP...

Страница 584: ...ontinue with Step 4 Note The TID to NSAP function is not available if the TARP data cache is not enabled on the Provisioning OSI TARP tab a Click the TID to NSAP button b In the TID to NSAP dialog box enter the TID you want to map to an NSAP c Click OK then click OK in the information message box d On the TDC tab click Refresh If TARP finds the TID in its TDC it returns the matching NSAP If not TA...

Страница 585: ...cuit will originate Figure 18 11 If you choose an STM N card you can map the VC11 to VC4 for optical transport Figure 18 11 Defining the Circuit Source on an STM 16 Card Step 3 Choose the port from the Port drop down list Purpose This task provisions an optical circuit source and destination for a low order VC11 circuit Tools Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP D60 Log into CTC page 17 49 N...

Страница 586: ...p 11 See Table 6 2 on page 6 3 for a list of valid options CTC does not show ports VC4s TUG3s TUG2s or VC11s already used by other circuits Note If you and a user working on the same network choose the same VC4 TUG3 TUG2 or VC11 simultaneously one of you receives a Path in Use error and is unable to complete the circuit The user with the incomplete circuit needs to choose new destination parameter...

Страница 587: ...ng Preferences area you must complete the following steps Add two spans for all SNCP ring or unprotected portions of the circuit route from the source to the destination Add one span for all MS SPRing or 1 1 portions of the route from the source to the destination Step 7 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D188 View CE Series Ethernet and POS Ports Statistics PM Parameters Note For CE Ser...

Страница 588: ... PM parameter names that appear in the Param column The PM parameter values appear in the Port columns For PM parameter definitions refer to the Performance Monitoring chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Note To refresh reset or clear PM counts see the NTP D257 Change the PM Display procedure on page 8 2 Step 5 Return to your originating procedure NTP 124471 Performance tab Statist...

Страница 589: ...lot is carrying traffic Working Active Note If the slot is not active look for conditions or alarms that might be preventing the card from carrying working traffic Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide Step 5 When the working slot is carrying traffic clear the Manual switch a In the Switch Commands field choose Clear b Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box Step 6 Verify that th...

Страница 590: ... 2 Click the Performance Ether Ports Utilization Figure 18 13 or Performance POS Ports Utilization tabs Figure 18 13 Ether Ports Utilization on the CE Series Card View Performance Window Step 3 Click Refresh Performance monitoring statistics for each port on the card appear Purpose This task enables you to view CE Series card Ethernet and POS port Utilization PM counts at selected time intervals t...

Страница 591: ...ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide The card is part of a protection group see the DLP D155 Delete a Protection Group task on page 18 47 The card has circuits see the DLP D27 Delete Circuits task on page 17 21 The card is part of an MS SPRing see the NTP D213 Remove an MS SPRing Node procedure on page 14 7 The card is being used for timing see the DLP D157 Change the Node Timing Source task on pag...

Страница 592: ... want to view PM counts The card view appears Step 2 Click the Performance Ether Ports History Figure 18 14 or Performance POS Ports History tabs Figure 18 14 Ether Ports History on the CE Series Card View Performance Window Purpose This task enables you to view CE Series card Ethernet and POS port History PM counts at selected time intervals to detect possible performance problems Tools Equipment...

Страница 593: ...ing Defaults tabs Step 2 In the Defaults Selector area choose NODE security grantPermission Step 3 Click in the Default Value column for the default property you are changing and choose Provisioning from the drop down list Note If you click Reset before you click Apply all values will return to their original settings Step 4 Click Apply A pencil icon appears next to the default name that will be c...

Страница 594: ...ation Ports with a Force switch applied are marked with an F b In the Set East Protection Operation dialog box choose CLEAR from the drop down list Click OK c In the Confirm MS SPRing Operation dialog box click Yes On the MS SPRing network graphic a green and a purple span line connects each node This is the normal display for MS SPRings when protection operations are not invoked Step 6 From the F...

Страница 595: ...This forces the first node to be their primary timing source See the DLP D157 Change the Node Timing Source task on page 18 48 Note This type of timing conforms to SETS requirements and is not considered optimal Step 5 If the removed node was not the only BITS timing source provision the adjacent nodes to line timing using SDH links east and west as timing sources traceable to the node with extern...

Страница 596: ...an where you want to switch SNCP traffic away Choose Circuits from the shortcut menu Step 3 In the Circuits on Span dialog box choose FORCE SWITCH AWAY Click Apply Step 4 In the Confirm SNCP Switch dialog box click Yes Step 5 In the Protection Switch Result dialog box click OK In the Circuits on Span window the Switch State for all circuits is FORCE Note A Force switch request on a span or card ca...

Страница 597: ... Circuits on Span dialog box choose CLEAR to remove the Force switch Click Apply Step 4 In the Confirm SNCP Switch dialog box click Yes Step 5 In the Protection Switch Result dialog box click OK In the Circuits on Span window the Switch State for all SNCP circuits is CLEAR Step 6 Return to your originating procedure NTP Purpose This task clears an SNCP Force switch Tools Equipment None Prerequisit...

Страница 598: ...18 86 Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide R7 0 78 17194 01 Chapter 18 DLPs D100 to D199 DLP D198 Clear an SNCP Force Switch ...

Страница 599: ... 1 optical protection group only the working port can be placed in the Lock On state Step 2 In node view click the Maintenance Protection tabs Step 3 In the Protection Groups list click the protection group where you want to apply the Lock On state Step 4 If you determine that the protect card is in standby mode and you want to apply the Lock On state to the protect card make the protect card acti...

Страница 600: ...s Step 3 In the Protection Groups list click the protection group that contains the card where you want to apply the lockout Step 4 In the Selected Group list click the card where you want to lock out traffic Step 5 In the Inhibit Switching area click Lock Out Step 6 Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box The lockout has been applied and traffic is switched to the opposite card To clear the lock...

Страница 601: ... the beam or view directly with optical instruments Statement 1051 Step 1 Remove the protective cap on the optical fiber cable connector Step 2 Read the manufacturer cleaning cartridge instructions to insert the connector into the cleaning cartridge Step 3 Slide the lever on the cartridge to swipe the connector surface Step 4 Insert the fiber connector into the applicable adapter or attach a dust ...

Страница 602: ...If the connector is not clean repeat Steps 1 to 3 Step 5 Insert the fiber connector into the applicable adapter or attach a dust cap to the fiber connector Note If you must replace a dust cap on a connector first verify that the dust cap is clean To clean the dust cap wipe the outside of the cap using a dry lint free wipe and the inside of the dust cap using a CLETOP stick swab 14100400 Step 6 Ret...

Страница 603: ...rms Using the AIC I Card Step 1 Confirm that external device relays are wired to the ENVIR ALARMS IN pins on the MIC A P Front Mount Electrical Connection FMEC See the DLP D324 Install Alarm Cables on the MIC A P task on page 20 12 for more information Step 2 In node view double click the AIC I card to display it in card view Step 3 Click the Provisioning External Alarms tabs Purpose This task del...

Страница 604: ... A P card connector See the DLP D324 Install Alarm Cables on the MIC A P task on page 20 12 for more information Step 2 In node view double click the AIC I card to display it in card view Step 3 On the External Controls subtab modify any of the following fields for each external control wired to the ONS 15454 SDH MIC A P card For definitions of these fields see the NTP D247 Provision External Alar...

Страница 605: ... AIC I card to display it in card view Step 2 Click the Provisioning Local Orderwire tabs or the Provisioning Express Orderwire tabs depending on the orderwire path that you want to create Step 3 If needed adjust the transmit Tx and receive Rx decibel referred to one milliwatt dBm by moving the slider to the right or left for the headset type four wire or two wire that you will use In general you ...

Страница 606: ...vice state for the port See the DLP D214 Change the Service State for a Port task on page 19 10 for more information Flow Control Select the flow control for the port Possible values are None Symmetrical and Pass Through Auto Negotiation Click this check box to enable autonegotiation on the port default If you do not want to enable autonegotiation control uncheck the box MTU If you want to permit ...

Страница 607: ...umeric and up to 48 characters including spaces Type Choose either User Data F1 or User Data D4 D12 from the drop down list Step 4 Click Next Step 5 In the Circuit Source area complete the following Node Choose the source node Slot Choose the source slot Port If displayed choose the source port Step 6 Click Next Step 7 In the Circuit Destination area complete the following Node Choose the destinat...

Страница 608: ...RV COND command Use the Locked enabled maintenance service state for testing or to suppress alarms temporarily A port must be in this service state before you can apply a loopback Change to the Unlocked enabled or Unlocked disabled automaticInService when testing is complete Unlocked automaticInService Puts the port in the Unlocked disabled automaticInService service state In this service state al...

Страница 609: ...ted links go to Step 8 To filter links by class go to Step 9 Step 3 Right click the network map and select Show Link Icons to toggle the link icons on and off Step 4 To consolidate all the links on the network map global consolidation a Right click anywhere on the network map b Choose Collapse Expand Links from the shortcut menu The Collapse Expand Links dialog box appears c Select the check boxes...

Страница 610: ...olidation only the DCC links will consolidate leaving any other link classes expanded Figure 19 1 shows a network view with unconsolidated DCC and PPC links Figure 19 1 Unconsolidated Links in Network View Figure 19 2 shows a network view with globally consolidated links Figure 19 2 Consolidated Links in Network View Figure 19 3 shows a different network view with local DCC link consolidation betw...

Страница 611: ...A cascading menu appears where you can select an action for the individual link or navigate to one of the nodes where the link is attached Step 8 To expand locally consolidated links right click the consolidated link and choose Expand link class Links from the shortcut menu where link class is DCC GCC OTS PPC or Server Trail Step 9 To filter the links by class a Click the Link Filter button in the...

Страница 612: ...ols Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP D60 Log into CTC page 17 49 Required As Needed As needed Onsite Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 19 2 STM N Maintenance Settings Parameter Description Options Port number Display only Port number ALS Mode Automatic laser shutdown mode ALS provides the ability to shut down the TX laser when the RX detects a loss of si...

Страница 613: ...e is repeated Numeric For the default values and domains of user provisionable card settings refer to the Network Element Defaults appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Currently Shutdown Display only Displays the current status of the laser Numeric For the default values and domains of user provisionable card settings refer to the Network Element Defaults appendix in the Cisco ONS ...

Страница 614: ...squares on the node icons represent the MS SPRing working and protect channels You can right click either channel For four fiber MS SPRings the squares represent ports Right click either the working or protect ports b In the Set East Protection Operation dialog box choose EXERCISE RING from the drop down list c Click OK d In the Confirm MS SPRing Operation dialog box click Yes On the network view ...

Страница 615: ...and the protect path on a separate fiber pair This feature only applies to bidirectional SNCP circuits Revertive Check this box if you want traffic to revert to the working path when the conditions that diverted it to the protect path are repaired If you do not choose Revertive traffic remains on the protect path after the switch Reversion time If Revertive is checked click the Reversion time fiel...

Страница 616: ...ce VC4 change it in the Source VC4 field otherwise continue with Step 4 Step 4 Click Add Span The span is added to the Included Spans list and the span arrow turns blue Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until the tunnel is provisioned from the source to the destination node through all intermediary nodes Step 6 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D220 Provision E Series Ethernet Ports Step 1 In...

Страница 617: ...work congestion by mapping Ethernet traffic to different priority levels Refer to the priority queuing information in the Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454 Cisco ONS 15454 SDH and Cisco ONS 15327 This parameter does not apply to an E Series card in port mapped mode Stp Enabled Click this check box to enable Spanning Tree Protocol STP on the port This pa...

Страница 618: ...Note Each Ethernet port must be attached to at least one untagged VLAN A trunk port connects multiple VLANs to an external device such as a switch which also supports trunking A trunk port must have tagging IEEE 802 1Q enabled for all the VLANs that connect to that external device Step 4 After each port is in the appropriate VLAN click Apply Table 19 3 lists the VLAN settings Note If Tagged is cho...

Страница 619: ...To permit the acceptance of jumbo size Ethernet frames choose Jumbo default If you do not want to permit jumbo size Ethernet frames choose 1548 Note The maximum frame size of 1548 bytes enables the port to accept valid Ethernet frames that use protocols such as Inter Switch Link ISL protocol ISL adds 30 bytes of overhead and might cause the frame size to exceed the traditional 1518 byte maximum Pa...

Страница 620: ...sioning POS Alarming Alarm Profile Editor tabs if you want to apply the profile to the packet over SDH POS ports For more information about ML Series card ports and service refer to the Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454 Cisco ONS 15454 SDH and Cisco ONS 15327 If the card is an FC_MR 4 card click the Provisioning Alarm Profiles Alarm Profile Editor tabs ...

Страница 621: ... node click the node in the Node Names list If you want to save the profile to all nodes click Select All If you do not want to save the profile to any nodes click Select None If you want to update alarm profile information click Synchronize b Click OK Step 11 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D224 Adjust the Java Virtual Memory Heap Size Step 1 From the Windows task bar click Start Set...

Страница 622: ... view at one node the Alarms tab in the network and card views of that node will also show the tool enabled All other nodes in the network will also have the tool enabled If you filter an alarm in card view the alarm will still be displayed in node view In this view the card will display the color of the highest level alarm The alarm is also shown for the node in network view Step 3 If you want al...

Страница 623: ...ep 2 Right click the green line containing the circuits that you want to view and choose one of the following Circuits To view MS SPRing SNCP ring 1 1 virtual concatenated VCAT or unprotected circuits on the span PCA Circuits To view circuits routed on an MS SPRing protected channel This option does not appear if the span you right clicked is not an MS SPRing span Purpose This task turns off speci...

Страница 624: ...ctive and LOCKOUT OF PROTECTION a span lockout is active Note You can perform other procedures from the Circuits on Span dialog box If the span is in an SNCP you can switch the span traffic See the DLP D197 Initiate an SNCP Force Switch task on page 18 84 for instructions If you want to edit a circuit on the span double click the circuit See the DLP D231 Edit a Circuit Name task on page 19 27 or t...

Страница 625: ...the group and to stop sending traffic Locked enabled outOfGroup only applies to the cross connects on an end node where the VCAT resides The cross connects on intermediate nodes are in the Locked enabled maintenance service state For additional information about circuit service states refer to the Circuits and Tunnels chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Step 6 If you want to apply ...

Страница 626: ...indow verify that the circuit was correctly renamed Step 9 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D232 Change Active and Standby Span Color Step 1 From the Edit menu in node network or card view choose Preferences Step 2 In the Preferences dialog box click the Circuit tab Step 3 Complete one or more of the following steps as required To change the color of the active working span continue wi...

Страница 627: ...es dialog box open Step 7 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D233 Edit SNCP Circuit Path Selectors Step 1 From the View menu choose Go to Network View Step 2 Click the Circuits tab Step 3 In the Circuits tab click the SNCP circuit s that you want to edit To change the settings for multiple circuits press the Shift key to choose adjoining circuits or the Ctrl key to choose nonadjoining ci...

Страница 628: ...ination of One Optical Circuit Step 1 From the View menu choose Go To Network View Step 2 Click the Circuits tab Step 3 Click the circuit that you want to roll The circuit must have a DISCOVERED status for you to start a roll Step 4 From the Tools menu choose Circuits Roll Circuit Step 5 In the Roll Attributes area complete the following Figure 19 5 a From the Circuit Roll Mode drop down list choo...

Страница 629: ...at you want to keep Figure 19 6 This facility is the fixed location in the cross connect involved in the roll process The identifier appears in the text box below the graphic image The facility that is not selected is the Roll From path The Roll From path is deleted after the roll is completed Figure 19 6 Selecting a Path Step 8 Click Next Step 9 In the Select New End Point area choose the Slot Po...

Страница 630: ...is not found refer to the Circuits and Timing section of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide To cancel the roll see the DLP D240 Cancel a Roll task on page 19 43 The roll is a one way destination roll and the Roll Valid Signal is false It is not possible to get a Roll Valid Signal status of true for a one way destination roll Note You cannot cancel an automatic roll after a valid signal ...

Страница 631: ...wo circuits that you want to use in the roll process The circuits must have a DISCOVERED status in addition they must be the same size and direction for you to start a roll The planned Roll To circuit must not carry traffic The Roll To facility should be DCC connected to the source node of the Roll To circuit Step 4 From the Tools menu choose Circuits Roll Circuit Step 5 In the Roll Attributes are...

Страница 632: ...ed Step 8 Click Next Step 9 In the Select New End Point area choose the Slot Port and VC4 from the drop down lists to identify the Roll To facility on the connection being rolled Step 10 Click Finish The statuses of the Roll From and Roll To circuits change from DISCOVERED to ROLL_PENDING in the Circuits tab Step 11 Click the Rolls tab For the pending roll view the Roll Valid Signal status When on...

Страница 633: ...r originating procedure NTP DLP D236 Roll Two Cross Connects on One Optical Circuit Using Automatic Routing Step 1 From the View menu choose Go To Network View Step 2 Click the Circuits tab Step 3 Click the circuit that has the connections that you want to roll The circuit must have a DISCOVERED status for you to start a roll Step 4 From the Tools menu choose Circuits Roll Circuit Step 5 In the Ro...

Страница 634: ...ect the path from which you want to roll traffic and click OK If multiple Roll From paths do not exist continue with Step 10 The circuit status for the Roll To path changes states from DISCOVERED to ROLL_PENDING Step 10 In the Pivot Fixed Point 2 window click the square that represents the fixed path of the second connection to be rolled The path that is not selected is the Roll From path The Roll...

Страница 635: ...e primary and alternate paths for extended SNCP portions of the complete circuit path are needed The paths might be node diverse but CTC does not check for node diversity Step 14 If you checked Route Automatically in Step 12 If you checked Using Required Nodes Spans continue with Step 15 If you checked only Review Route Before Creation continue with Step 16 If you did not check Using Required Node...

Страница 636: ...w rolls now appear For each pending roll view the Roll Valid Signal status When one of the following requirements is met continue with Step 19 If the Roll Valid Signal status is true a valid signal was found on the new port If the Roll Valid Signal status is false a valid signal was not found Wait until the signal is found before continuing with the next step If a valid signal is not found refer t...

Страница 637: ...nect involved in the roll process The path identifier appears in the text box below the graphic image The path that is not selected contains the Roll From path The Roll From path is deleted after the roll is completed Step 8 Click Next Step 9 Complete one of the following If multiple Roll From paths exist the Select Roll From dialog box appears Select the path from which you want to roll traffic a...

Страница 638: ...ioned in this statement If the termination card is a DS3i N 12 E1 N 14 E1 42 or E3 12 card a roll will occur even if a valid signal is not detected on the Roll To port The absence of a PDI P downstream for LOS LOF and AIS line defects causes the roll to continue without a valid signal Step 17 Click Finish In the Circuits tab verify that a new circuit appears This circuit is the Roll To circuit It ...

Страница 639: ...ted to the destination node of the Roll To circuit Step 4 From the Tools menu choose Circuits Roll Circuit Step 5 In the Roll Attributes area complete the following a From the Circuit Roll Mode drop down list choose Auto to create an automatic roll required for a 1 way source roll or Manual to create a manual roll required for 1 way destination roll b From the Circuit Roll Type drop down list choo...

Страница 640: ...NDING Step 13 Click the Rolls tab Two new rolls now appear on the Rolls tab For each pending roll view the Roll Valid Signal status When one of the following conditions is met continue with Step 14 If the Roll Valid Signal status is true a valid signal was found on the new port If the Roll Valid Signal status is false a valid signal was not found Wait until the signal is found before continuing wi...

Страница 641: ...ircuit back Purpose This task deletes a roll Use caution when selecting this option traffic might be affected Delete a roll only if it cannot be completed or cancelled in normal ways Circuits might have a PARTIAL status when this option is selected See Table 20 31 on page 20 77 for a description of circuit statuses Tools Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP D60 Log into CTC page 17 49 NTP D3...

Страница 642: ...el port information more clearly click an icon on the Edit MS SPRing network graphic and while pressing Ctrl drag the icon to a new location Step 4 Right click the MS SPRing node channel port where the Manual ring switch was applied and choose Set West Protection Operation or Set East Protection Operation as applicable Step 5 In the dialog box choose CLEAR from the drop down list Click OK Step 6 C...

Страница 643: ... that will connect to the existing MS SPRing through the node s east line port If you are adding the node to a four fiber MS SPRing complete the following for the second set of fibers Span Reversion Enter the span reversion time of the existing MS SPRing West Line Enter the slot on the node that will connect to the existing MS SPRing through the node s west line port East Line Enter the slot on th...

Страница 644: ... number between 2 and 4093 that is not already assigned to an existing VLAN Each ONS 15454 SDH network supports a maximum of 509 user provisionable VLANs Topology Host Choose the node to serve as the topology host from the drop down list The topology host is used to discover the VLAN topology The login node is the default Step 5 Click OK Step 6 Click Close Step 7 Return to your originating procedu...

Страница 645: ...ialization Tool Step 5 Complete the following fields GNE IP If the node you are reinitializing is accessed through another node configured as a gateway network element GNE enter the GNE IP address If you have a direct connection to the node leave this field blank Node IP Enter the node name or IP address of the node that you are reinitializing Purpose This task reinitializes the ONS 15454 SDH usin...

Страница 646: ...base to the node This is equivalent to the CTC database restore operation If unchecked the node database is not modified Confirm Check this box if you want a warning message displayed before any operation is performed If unchecked reinitialization does not display a warning message Search Path Enter the path to the CISCO15454SDH folder on the CD drive Step 6 Click Go Caution Before continuing with...

Страница 647: ... software version If unchecked reinitialization will not send the software package if the node is already running the same version Activate Revert Check this box to activate the uploaded software if the software version is later than the one installed or revert to the uploaded software if the software version is earlier than the one installed as soon as the software file is uploaded If unchecked t...

Страница 648: ...P DLP D246 Provision E Series Ethernet Card Mode Caution You cannot change the mode while the Ethernet card is carrying circuits If you want change the card mode delete any circuits that it carries first See the NTP D288 Modify and Delete Overhead Circuits and Server Trails procedure on page 7 4 Step 1 In network view double click the node containing the E Series Ethernet card that you want to pro...

Страница 649: ...enance Protection tabs d Double click the protection group that contains the reporting card e Click the active card of the selected group f Click Switch and Yes in the Confirmation dialog box Step 2 In CTC right click the card that you want to remove and choose Change Card Step 3 From the Change Card drop down list choose the card type and click OK An MEA alarm appears until you replace the card S...

Страница 650: ...All network changes should be approved by your network or LAN administrator Step 1 If you are in network view switch to node view by double clicking the node you want to turn up on the network map Purpose This task removes VLANs from a domain Tools Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures See Chapter 6 Create Circuits and Low Order Tunnels for circuit creation procedures Required As Needed As needed...

Страница 651: ...PF is enabled on both the ONS 15454 SDH and the LAN where the ONS 15454 SDH is connected Forward DHCP Request To Select this check box to enable DHCP Also enter the DHCP server IP address in the Request To field The box is unchecked by default If you will enable any of the gateway settings to implement the ONS 15454 SDH proxy server features leave this field blank Note If you enable DHCP computers...

Страница 652: ... not have direct IP connectivity to these nodes or to any LAN WAN that those nodes might be connected to Gateway Network Element GNE Choose this option when the ONS 15454 SDH is connected to a LAN and has DCC connections to other nodes A CTC computer connected to the LAN can manage all nodes that have DCC connections to the GNE but the CTC computer does not have direct IP connectivity to them The ...

Страница 653: ... new network information Memory test 1 to 2 minutes If an AIC or AIC I card is installed the AIC is updated The standby TCC2 TCC2P becomes the active TCC2 TCC2P ACT STBY Flashing green AIC FAIL and alarm LEDs light up briefly 1 ACT STBY Flashing yellow 2 FAIL LED Solid red 3 All LEDs on except ACT STBY 4 CRIT turns off 5 MAJ and MIN turn off 6 REM SYNC and ACO turn off 7 All LEDs except A B PWR tu...

Страница 654: ...ive on LAN When checked enables the ONS 15454 SDH OSPF topology to be advertised to OSPF routers on the LAN Enable this field on ONS 15454 SDH nodes that directly connect to OSPF routers LAN Port Area ID Enter the OSPF area ID dotted decimal format for the router port where the ONS 15454 SDH is connected This number is different from the DCC OSPF area ID Step 4 By default OSPF is set to No Authent...

Страница 655: ... the router to the other nodes that reside within the ONS 15454 SDH OSPF area a Under OSPF Area Range Table click Create b In the Create Area Range dialog box enter the following Range Address Enter the area IP address for the ONS 15454 SDH nodes that reside within the OSPF area For example if the ONS 15454 SDH OSPF area includes nodes with IP addresses 10 10 20 100 10 10 30 150 10 10 40 200 and 1...

Страница 656: ...list depending on which version is supported in your network Step 4 Set the RIP metric The RIP metric can be set to a number between 1 and 15 and represents the number of hops Step 5 By default RIP is set to No Authentication If the router that the ONS 15454 SDH is connected to requires authentication complete the following steps If not continue with Step 6 a Click the No Authentication button b I...

Страница 657: ... Troubleshooting Guide if necessary Step 3 Click the Conditions tab Verify that no unexplained conditions appear on the network If unexplained conditions appear resolve them before continuing Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide Step 4 On the network view map double click the node containing the TCC2 TCC2P cards that you are testing to open the node in node view Step 5 Make a not...

Страница 658: ... the View menu choose Go to Network View Step 2 Click the Alarms tab a Verify that the alarm filter is not on See the DLP D227 Disable Alarm Filtering task on page 19 25 as necessary b Verify that no unexplained alarms appear on the network If unexplained alarms appear resolve them before continuing Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide if necessary Step 3 Click the Conditions tab...

Страница 659: ...p 12 Wait 60 seconds then repeat Steps 7 through 9 to return the active standby slots to their configuration at the start of the procedure Step 13 Verify that the cross connect cards appear as you noted in Step 6 Step 14 Return to your originating procedure NTP Note During a maintenance side switch or soft reset of an active XC10G card the 1 1 protection group might display a protection switch To ...

Страница 660: ...p 2 Click the Performance Utilization tabs Step 3 Click Refresh Performance monitoring utilization values appear for each port on the card Step 4 View the Port column to find the port you want to monitor Step 5 The Tx and Rx bandwidth utilization values for the previous time intervals appear in the Prev n columns For PM parameter definitions refer to the Performance Monitoring chapter in the Cisco...

Страница 661: ...cedure NTP DLP D259 Refresh Ethernet PM Counts at a Different Time Interval Step 1 In node view double click the Ethernet card where you want to view PM counts The card view appears Step 2 Click the Performance tab Step 3 Click the Utilization tab or the History tab Step 4 From the Interval drop down list choose one of the following options 1 min This option displays the specified PM counts in one...

Страница 662: ...sh feature 15 Seconds This option sets the window auto refresh at 15 second time intervals 30 Seconds This option sets the window auto refresh at 30 second time intervals 1 Minute This option sets the window auto refresh at 1 minute time intervals 3 Minutes This option sets the window auto refresh at 3 minute time intervals 5 Minutes This option sets the window auto refresh at 5 minute time interv...

Страница 663: ...that originate terminate or pass through a specific card double click the card on the shelf graphic in node view to show the card in card view Step 2 Click the Circuits tab Step 3 Set the attributes for filtering the circuit display a Click Filter b In the General tab of the Circuit Filter dialog box set the following filter attributes as necessary Name Enter a complete or partial circuit name to ...

Страница 664: ...its VC_LO_PATH_TUNNEL displays only low order tunnels VC_LO_PATH_AGGREGATION displays only low order aggregation points VC_HO_PATH_VCAT_CIRCUIT displays high order VCAT circuits VC_LO_PATH_VCAT_CIRCUIT displays low order VCAT circuits or OCHNC displays only OCHNCs refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Procedure Guide for DWDM information Size Click the appropriate check boxes to filter circuits based ...

Страница 665: ...n the Hold off Timer column double click the cell of the circuit span you want to edit then type the new hold off time The range is 0 to 10 000 ms in increments of 100 Step 6 Repeat Step 5 as needed to adjust the hold off timer for each circuit span Step 7 Click Apply then close the Edit Circuit window by choosing Close from the File menu Step 8 Return to your originating procedure NTP Purpose Thi...

Страница 666: ...s the path trace string must be identical for all members of the VCAT circuit Purpose This task creates a J1 path trace on VC3 or VC4 circuit source ports and destination ports or a VCAT circuit member Tools Equipment ONS 15454 SDH cards capable of transmitting and or receiving J1 path trace must be installed at the circuit source and destination ports See Table 19 5 on page 19 68 for a list of ca...

Страница 667: ...the J1 transmits a string of null characters d Click Apply then click Close Step 8 Provision the circuit destination transmit string a On the detailed circuit map right click the circuit destination port and choose Edit Path Trace from the shortcut menu b In the New Transmit String field enter the string that you want the circuit destination to transmit Enter a string that makes the destination po...

Страница 668: ...t the circuit source should receive from the circuit destination in the New Expected String field If you set Path Trace Mode to Auto skip this step d Click the Disable AIS and RDI if TIM P is detected check box if you want to suppress the AIS and RDI when the VC3 or VC4 HP TIM or LP TIM alarm appears Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for descriptions of alarms and conditions e...

Страница 669: ... the text as needed Step 3 If you want to preview your changed statement and formatting click the Preview subtab Purpose This task modifies the legal disclaimer statement shown in the CTC login window so that it will display customer specific information when users log into the network Tools Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP D60 Log into CTC page 17 49 Required As Needed As needed Onsite ...

Страница 670: ...rward DHCP Requests To MAC Address Net Subnet Mask Length TCC CORBA IIOP Listener Port Gateway Settings See the DLP D249 Provision IP Settings task on page 19 52 for detailed field descriptions Step 3 Click Apply If you changed a network field that will cause the node to reboot the Change Network Configuration confirmation dialog box appears If you changed a gateway setting a confirmation appropri...

Страница 671: ...o the graphic file you want to use as a background Step 5 Select the file Click Open Step 6 Click Apply and then click OK Step 7 If the ONS 15454 SDH icons are not visible right click the network view and choose Zoom Out Repeat this step until all the ONS 15454 SDH icons are visible Step 8 If you need to reposition the node icons drag and drop them one at a time to a new location on the map Step 9...

Страница 672: ...s or uncheck the individual dialog boxes that you want to appear Don t Show Any Hides all do not display check boxes Show All Overrides do not display check box selections and displays all dialog boxes Step 4 Click OK Step 5 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D271 Change Node Security Policy on a Single Node Step 1 In node view click the Provisioning Security Policy tabs Purpose This tas...

Страница 673: ...sswords the user must create before they can reuse a password New Password must Differ from the Old Password Choose the number of characters that must differ between the old and new password The default number is 1 Cannot Change New Password for days If checked prevents users from changing their password for the specified period The range is 20 to 95 days Require Password Change on First Login to ...

Страница 674: ... modify the following Prevent Reusing Last Passwords Choose a value between 1 and 10 to set the number of different passwords the user must create before they can reuse a password New Password must Differ from the Old Password Choose the number of characters that must differ between the old and new password The default number is 1 Cannot Change New Password for days If checked prevents users from ...

Страница 675: ...nd must match the community name of the network management system Note The default UDP port for SNMP is 162 Step 4 Set the Trap Version field for either SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 Refer to your NMS documentation to determine whether to use SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 Step 5 If you want to allow the ONS 15454 SDH SNMP agent to accept SNMP SET requests on certain MIBs check the Allow SNMP Sets check box If the box is no...

Страница 676: ...an MS SPRing Force Ring Switch task on page 20 3 Step 2 Remove the fiber from both endpoints and ensure that traffic is still running Step 3 Remove the STM N cards from both endpoints Step 4 From both endpoints in node view right click each STM N slot and choose Change Card Step 5 In the Change Card dialog box choose the new STM N card type Step 6 Click OK Step 7 Complete the NTP D16 Install STM N...

Страница 677: ... ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide for information about this alarm Step 1 Apply a Force switch to both span endpoints nodes on the span that you will upgrade first See the DLP D303 Initiate an MS SPRing Force Ring Switch task on page 20 3 Step 2 Remove the fiber from both working and protect cards at both span endpoints nodes and ensure that traffic is still running Step 3 Remove the STM N card...

Страница 678: ...n SNCP Force Switch task on page 18 84 to apply a Force switch on the span that you will upgrade Step 2 Remove the fiber from both endpoint nodes in the span and ensure that traffic is still running Step 3 Remove the STM N cards from both span endpoints Step 4 For both ends of the span in node view right click each STM N slot and choose Change Card Step 5 In the Change Card dialog box choose the n...

Страница 679: ...nance Protection tabs b Choose the protection group from the Protection Groups area In the Selected Group area the working and protect spans appear c In the Selected Group area click the protect STM N port d In Switch Commands choose Force e Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box FORCE SWITCH TO WORKING appears next to the forced span Step 2 Repeat Step 1 for each port you will upgrade Step 3 Re...

Страница 680: ...on dialog box Step 12 Repeat this task for any other spans in the 1 1 linear configuration Step 13 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D297 Perform a Manual Span Upgrade on an Unprotected Span Warning Do not reach into a vacant slot or chassis while you install or remove a module or a fan Exposed circuitry could constitute an energy hazard Statement 206 Caution Upgrading unprotected spans...

Страница 681: ...etters L for lockout ring F for Force ring M for Manual ring and E for Exercise ring Step 3 A second verification method can be performed from the Conditions tab Click Retrieve Conditions and verify that no switches are active Make sure the Filter button is not selected Step 4 Click the Alarms tab a Verify that the alarm filter is not on See the DLP D227 Disable Alarm Filtering task on page 19 25 ...

Страница 682: ...ts Right click either working port b In the Set West Protection Operation dialog box choose LOCKOUT SPAN from the drop down list Click OK c In the Confirm MS SPRing Operation dialog box click Yes An L indicating the lockout appears on the selected channel port where you invoked the protection switch Performing a lockout switch generates LKOUTPR S and FE LOCKOUTOFPR SPAN conditions Step 5 To lock o...

Страница 683: ...sco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide R7 0 78 17194 01 Chapter 19 DLPs D200 to D299 DLP D299 Initiate an MS SPRing Span Lockout Step 6 From the File menu choose Close Step 7 Return to your originating procedure NTP ...

Страница 684: ...19 86 Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide R7 0 78 17194 01 Chapter 19 DLPs D200 to D299 DLP D299 Initiate an MS SPRing Span Lockout ...

Страница 685: ...ose Go to Network View Step 2 Click the Provisioning MS SPRing tabs Step 3 Choose the MS SPRing and click Edit Tip To move an icon to a new location for example to see MS SPRing channel port information more clearly press Ctrl and drag and drop the icon to a new location on the Edit MS SPRing network graphic Step 4 Right click the MS SPRing node channel port where the lockout will be cleared and c...

Страница 686: ...PRing working and protect channels You can right click either channel For four fiber MS SPRings the squares represent ports Right click either working port Step 5 In the Set West Protection Operation dialog box or the Set East Protection Operation dialog box choose MANUAL RING from the drop down list Click OK Step 6 Click Yes in the two Confirm MS SPRing Operation dialog boxes Step 7 Verify that t...

Страница 687: ...tion You can also return to network view and change the positions of the network node icons because MS SPRing node icons are based on the network view node icon positions Note For two fiber MS SPRings the squares on the node icons represent the MS SPRing working and protect channels You can right click either channel For four fiber MS SPRings the squares represent ports Right click either working ...

Страница 688: ...Ring working and protect channels You can right click either channel For four fiber MS SPRings the squares represent ports Right click either working port b In the Set East Protection Operation dialog box choose FORCE RING from the drop down list Click OK c Click Yes in the two Confirm MS SPRing Operation dialog boxes that appear On the network graphic an F appears on the working MS SPRing channel...

Страница 689: ...rom the Port drop down list choose the port where the circuit will originate This field might not be available depending on the card chosen in Step 2 Purpose This task changes the screen view to display the Ethernet Trunk bandwidth usage on a selected card Tools Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP D60 Log into CTC page 17 49 Required As Needed As needed Onsite Remote Onsite or remote Securi...

Страница 690: ...list choose the slot containing the card where the circuit will originate Step 3 From the Port drop down list choose the port where the circuit will originate This field might not be available depending on the card chosen in Step 2 Step 4 Complete one of the following For low order VC12 circuits choose the VC4 TUG3 TUG2 and VC12 For low order VC11 circuits choose the VC4 TUG3 TUG2 and VC11 For low...

Страница 691: ...ort number you are assigning a name to and enter the desired port name The port name can be up to 32 alphanumeric special characters and is blank by default Step 4 Click Apply Step 5 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D315 Log Out a User on a Single Node Step 1 In node view click the Provisioning Security Active Logins tabs Step 2 Choose the user that you want to log out and click Logout...

Страница 692: ...o log out Step 4 Click Logout Step 5 In the Logout User dialog box check the nodes where you want to log out the user Step 6 In the Logout User dialog box check Lockout before Logout if you want to lock the user out prior to logout This prevents the user from logging in after logout based on user lockout parameters provisioned in the Policy tab Either a manual unlock by a Superuser only is require...

Страница 693: ...o a VC4 for optical transport Figure 20 2 shows an example of a circuit source for an E3 12 card Figure 20 2 Defining the Circuit Source on an E3 12 Card Step 3 Choose the port from the Port drop down list Step 4 Choose the VC4 from the VC4 drop down list Step 5 Choose the VC3 from the VC3 drop down list Purpose This task provisions a circuit source and destination for a low order VC3 circuit Tool...

Страница 694: ... 2 See Table 6 2 on page 6 3 for a list of valid options Cisco Transport Controller CTC does not show ports VC4s or VC3s already used by other circuits Note If you and a user working on the same network choose the same port VC4 or VC3 simultaneously one of you receives a Path in Use error and is unable to complete the circuit The user with the PARTIAL circuit needs to choose new destination parame...

Страница 695: ...rew the nut holding the ground wire to the shelf Remove the nut and washer Step 2 Remove the ground wire from the left side of the shelf Step 3 Pull the right side of the hinge locking spring Figure 20 4 Purpose This task removes the FMEC cover Tools Equipment Medium slot head screwdriver Prerequisite Procedures DLP D321 Open the FMEC Cover page 20 10 Required As Needed As needed Onsite Remote Ons...

Страница 696: ...0 64 mm 22 or 24 AWG wires connect the alarm and control wires on the appropriate pins of the DB 62 connector The pin connectors signal names and functions are listed in Table 20 1 Purpose This task installs alarm cables on the MIC A P FMEC so that you can provision external environmental alarms and controls with the AIC I card Tools Equipment DB 62 connector 0 51 mm or 0 64 mm 22 or 24 AWG wires ...

Страница 697: ... EXALM0 Extra alarm 0 Red blue 12 EXALM0 Extra alarm 0 Blue red 13 FGND Ground 14 EXALM1 Extra alarm 1 Red orange 15 EXALM1 Extra alarm 1 Orange red 16 EXALM2 Extra alarm 2 Red green 17 EXALM2 Extra alarm 2 Green red 18 EXALM3 Extra alarm 3 Red brown 19 EXALM3 Extra alarm 3 Brown red 20 EXALM4 Extra alarm 4 Red gray 21 EXALM4 Extra alarm 4 Gray red 22 EXALM5 Extra alarm 5 Black blue 23 EXALM5 Extr...

Страница 698: ...UP3 Normally open output pair number 4 Brown white 46 AUDALM0 Normally open minor audible alarm White gray 47 AUDALM0 Normally open minor audible alarm Gray white 48 AUDALM1 Normally open major audible alarm Red blue 49 AUDALM1 Normally open major audible alarm Blue red 50 AUDALM2 Normally open critical audible alarm Red orange 51 AUDALM2 Normally open critical audible alarm Orange red 52 FGND Gro...

Страница 699: ...ms Table 20 2 shows MIC C T P pin assignments A high impedance option 3 kilo ohms or greater is possible through a jumper on the MIC C T P FMEC You can change the top timing input to high impedance by removing the jumper on P3 on the MIC C T P FMEC You can change the bottom timing input to high impedance by removing the jumper on P2 of the MIC C T P FMEC Note Refer to ITU T G 813 for rules about p...

Страница 700: ... card is not connected to the same LAN Step 1 Using 0 51 mm or 0 64 mm 22 or 24 AWG wire or CAT 5 UTP Ethernet cable connect the wires to the RJ 45 connector according to Table 20 3 and crimp the connector to the cable Purpose This task installs the LAN wires on the MIC C T P FMEC Tools Equipment Standard CAT 5 unshielded twisted pair UTP Ethernet cable straight through for data terminal equipment...

Страница 701: ...ther end of the cable to the external source or sink of the signal Step 4 Repeat Step 3 for each cable required Step 5 Return to your originating procedure NTP LAN 1 Connecting to DTE a PC workstation or router Straight through Ethernet cable 1 1 PNMSRX white green 2 2 PNMSRX green 3 3 PNMSTX white orange 4 4 5 5 6 6 PNMSTX orange 7 7 8 8 1 The Cisco ONS 15454 SDH is DCE Purpose This task installs...

Страница 702: ...anced 120 ohm E 1 interfaces must be done according to Table 20 5 Purpose This task installs the 120 ohm E 1 cables on the FMEC DS1 E1 card Tools Equipment Twisted pair cables with DB 37 connectors Prerequisite Procedures NTP D220 Install the Power and Signal FMECs page 1 7 Required As Needed As needed Onsite Remote Onsite Security Level None Table 20 4 Pinout for E 1 Interfaces on Ports 1 to 7 Pi...

Страница 703: ...gnal Step 4 Repeat Step 2 and Step 3 for each cable required Step 5 Return to your originating procedure NTP Table 20 5 Pinout for E 1 Interfaces on Ports 8 to 14 Pin No Signal Name Pin No Signal Name 1 GND 20 RX 14 P 2 TX 14 P 21 RX 14 N 3 TX 14 N 22 GND 4 TX 13 P 23 RX 13 P 5 TX 13 N 24 RX 13 N 6 GND 25 RX 12 P 7 TX 12 P 26 RX 12 N 8 TX 12 N 27 GND 9 TX 11 P 28 RX 11 P 10 TX 11 N 29 RX 11 N 11 G...

Страница 704: ...X 10 P orange white 28 RX 10 P orange white 52 TX 20 P green black 76 RX 20 P green black 5 TX 9 N white green 29 RX 9 N white green 53 TX 19 N black brown 77 RX 19 N black brown 6 TX 9 P green white 30 RX 9 P green white 54 TX 19 P brown black 78 RX 19 P brown black 7 TX 8 N white brown 31 RX 8 N white brown 55 TX 18 N black slate 79 RX 18 N black slate 8 TX 8 P brown white 32 RX 8 P brown white ...

Страница 705: ...7 RX 40 N black brown 6 TX 30 P green white 30 RX 30 P green white 54 TX 40 P brown black 78 RX 40 P brown black 7 TX 29 N white brown 31 RX 29 N white brown 55 TX 39 N black slate 79 RX 39 N black slate 8 TX 29 P brown white 32 RX 29 P brown white 56 TX 39 P slate black 80 RX 39 P slate black 9 TX 28 N white slate 33 RX 28 N white slate 57 TX 38 N yellow blue 81 RX 38 N yellow blue 10 TX 28 P sla...

Страница 706: ...rd go to Step b a For the TCC2 card All LEDs turn on briefly The red FAIL LED and the yellow ACT STBY LED turn on for about 15 seconds The red FAIL LED and the green ACT STBY LED turn on for about 40 seconds The red FAIL LED blinks for about 15 seconds The red FAIL LED turns on for about 15 seconds All LEDs turn on for about 3 seconds before turning off for about 3 seconds Both green PWR LEDs turn...

Страница 707: ...n for about 15 seconds The red FAIL LED blinks for about 10 seconds and then becomes solid All LEDs including the CRIT MAJ MIN REM SYNC and ACO LEDs blink once and turn off for about 5 seconds Both green PWR LEDs turn on for 10 seconds The PWR LEDs then turn red for 2 to 3 minutes before going to steady green During this time the ACT STBY MJ and MN LEDs might turn on followed by the SNYC LED brief...

Страница 708: ...tware upgrade document to replace the software To exchange the TCC2 TCC2P card see the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide Step 8 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for the redundant TCC2 TCC2P card Tip If you install a standby TCC2 TCC2P card that has a different software version than the active TCC card the newly installed standby TCC2 TCC2P card automatically copies the software version from the ac...

Страница 709: ... that you cannot insert the card any further Step 4 Verify the LED activity The red LED turns on for 20 to 30 seconds The red LED blinks for 35 to 45 seconds The red LED remains on for 5 to 10 seconds All LEDs blink once and turn on The ACT STBY LED turns on Note If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card all LEDs turn off Note If the red FAIL LED does not turn on check the ...

Страница 710: ... the red FAIL LED is on continuously or the LEDs act erratically the card is not installed properly Remove the card and repeat Steps 6 to 8 Step 9 Verify that the ACT STBY LED is amber for standby Step 10 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D334 Install the Alarm Interface Controller International Card Step 1 Open the latches ejectors on the card Step 2 Use the latches ejectors to firmly ...

Страница 711: ...Ds become green for approximately 3 seconds The PWR A LED turns green the INPUT OUTPUT LEDs turn off and the ACT LED turns on Note If the red FAIL LED does not illuminate check the power Note If you insert a card into a slot provisioned for a different card all LEDs turn off Note If the red FAIL LED is on continuously or the LEDs act erratically the card is not installed properly Remove the card a...

Страница 712: ...ith a handle Purpose This task installs Gigabit Interface Converters GBICs which are required for E Series Ethernet G Series Ethernet CE 1000 4 and FC_MR 4 cards and Small Form factor Pluggables SFPs XFPs which are required for ML1000 2 15454_MRC 12 MRC 12 OC192SR1 STM64IO Short Reach STM64 XFP Short Reach and OC192 STM64 Any Reach STM64 XFP Any Reach cards SFPs XFPs are hot swappable input output...

Страница 713: ...15454 GBIC LX ONS GC GE LX 1000BaseZX G1K 4 CE 1000 4 Extra long reach Single mode fiber up to 70 km long 15454E GBIC ZX 15454 GBIC ZX ONS GC GE ZX FC_MR 4 Long reach Single mode fiber 1310 nm ONS GX 2FC SML FC_MR 4 Intermediate reach Multi mode fiber 850 nm ONS GX 2FC MMI Table 20 9 Available SFPs XFPs SFP Associated Cards Application Fiber Product Number 1000BaseSX ML1000 2 Short reach Multimode...

Страница 714: ...de fiber up to 40 km long ONS SI 622 L1 OC 12 LR2 MRC 12 Long reach 1550 nm single mode fiber up to 80 km long ONS SI 622 L2 OC 12 CWDM1 MRC 12 Long reach 1470 to 1610 nm single mode fiber up to 80 km long ONS SE 622 1470 through ONS SE 622 1610 OC 3 IR1 MRC 12 Intermediate reach 1310 nm single mode fiber up to 15 km long ONS SI 155 I1 OC 3 LR1 MRC 12 Long reach 1310 nm single mode fiber up to 40 ...

Страница 715: ...orrect installation Figure 20 5 GBIC Installation with Clips b Slide the GBIC through the flap that covers the opening until you hear a click The click indicates that the GBIC is locked into the slot c When you are ready to attach the network fiber optic cable remove the protective plug from the GBIC save the plug for future use and install the fiber connector d Continue with Step 8 Step 5 For GBI...

Страница 716: ...provisioned in CTC If the SFP was not preprovisioned complete the DLP D132 Provision a Multirate PPM on the MRC 12 Card task on page 18 27 Step 8 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D336 Remove GBIC or SFP XFP Device Warning Class 1 laser product Statement 1008 Warning Because invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the aperture of the port when no cable is connected avoid exposure ...

Страница 717: ...Fiber connected to an east port at one node must plug into the west port at an adjacent node Caution Do not provision the SNCP east and west ports on the same STM N card Step 1 Plan your fiber connections Use the same plan for all SNCP nodes Step 2 Plug the fiber into the transmit Tx connector of an STM N card at one node and plug the other end of the fiber into the receive Rx connector of an STM ...

Страница 718: ...stall Fiber Optic Cables for SNCP Configurations Figure 20 6 Connecting Fiber to a Four Node SNCP Figure 20 7 shows an SNCP dual ring interconnect DRI example 68120 Node 1 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 4 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 2 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 3 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx ...

Страница 719: ...de SNCP DRI Figure 20 8 shows an integrated SNCP DRI example Node 1 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 3 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 2 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 4 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx 83499 Node 5 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 7 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 6 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 6 Tx Rx Slot 13 Tx Rx Slot 13 Tx Rx Slot 6 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 8 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx ...

Страница 720: ...CP Configurations Figure 20 8 Connecting Fiber to a Six Node Integrated SNCP DRI Step 4 Return to your originating procedure NTP Node 1 Node 3 Node 2 Node 4 Slot 5 Slot 12 Tx Rx Slot 5 Slot 12 Tx Rx Slot 6 Slot 13 Slot 5 Slot 12 Tx Rx Slot 5 Slot 12 Tx Rx Slot 6 Slot 13 Node 5 Node 6 Slot 5 Slot 12 Tx Rx Slot 5 Slot 12 Tx Rx 83500 ...

Страница 721: ...her end into the Rx connector of an STM N card at the adjacent node The card displays a SF LED if the transmit and receive fibers are mismatched Note Do not mix working and protect card connections when connecting a four fiber MS SPRing The MS SPRing does not function if working and protect cards are interconnected See Figure 20 10 on page 20 39 for an example of correct four fiber MS SPRing cabli...

Страница 722: ...a Four Node Two Fiber MS SPRing Figure 20 10 shows fiber connections for a four fiber MS SPRing Slot 5 west and Slot 12 east carry the working traffic Slot 6 west and Slot 13 east carry the protect traffic 55297 Node 1 West East West East West East West East Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 4 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 2 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx Node 3 Slot 5 Tx Rx Slot 12 Tx Rx ...

Страница 723: ...54 SDH Reference Manual Step 1 In node view double click the E1 N 14 or E1 42 card where you want to change the line or threshold settings Step 2 Click the Provisioning tab Purpose This task changes the line and threshold settings for the E1 N 14 or E1 42 E 1 cards Tools Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP D60 Log into CTC page 17 49 Required As Needed As needed Onsite Remote Onsite or remo...

Страница 724: ...s 3 through 5 for each subtab that has parameters you want to provision For definitions of the line settings see Table 20 10 For definitions of the line threshold settings see Table 20 11 on page 20 41 For definitions of the electrical path threshold settings see Table 20 12 on page 20 42 For definitions of the SDH threshold settings see Table 20 13 on page 20 42 Table 20 10 describes the values o...

Страница 725: ...er Secondary State For more information about service states refer to the Administrative and Service States appendix of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Unlocked enabled The port is fully operational and performing as provisioned Unlocked disabled automaticInService The port is out of service but traffic is carried Alarm reporting is suppressed The ONS node monitors the ports for an error ...

Страница 726: ... 20 11 Line Thresholds Options for E1 N 14 and E1 42 Cards continued Parameter Description Table 20 12 Electrical Path Threshold Options for E1 N 14 and E1 42 Cards Parameter Description Port Display only Port number 1 to 14 E1 N 14 card 1 to 42 E1 42 card EB Errored blocks BBE Background block errors ES Errored seconds SES Severely errored seconds UAS Unavailable seconds AISS Alarm indication sig...

Страница 727: ...Manage Alarms for information about the Alarm Profiles tab Note If you want to modify a threshold setting it might be necessary to click on the available directional type and interval 15 Min 1 Day radio buttons and then click Refresh This will display the desired threshold setting VC LO Virtual circuit low order VC4 Virtual circuit 4 15 Min radio button Clicking this radio button and then clicking...

Страница 728: ... 12 Cards Parameter Description Options Port Display only Port number 1 to 12 Port Name Port name User defined up to 32 alphanumeric special characters Blank by default See the DLP D314 Assign a Name to a Port task on page 20 7 SF BER Sets the signal fail bit error rate 1E 3 1E 4 1E 5 SD BER Sets the signal degrade bit error rate 1E 5 1E 6 1E 7 1E 8 1E 9 Admin State Sets the port service state unl...

Страница 729: ...ervice state for the duration of the soak period After the soak period ends the port service state changes to Unlocked enabled Locked enabled disabled The port is out of service and unable to carry traffic Locked enabled maintenance Theport is out of service for maintenance Alarm reporting is suppressed but traffic is carried and loopbacks are allowed AINS Soak Sets the automatic in service soak p...

Страница 730: ...ble seconds 15 Min radio button Clicking this radio button and then clicking Refresh will cause the threshold values on this tab to display for 15 minute intervals 1 Day radio button Clicking this radio button and then clicking Refresh will cause the threshold values on this tab to display for 1 day intervals Table 20 17 SDH Threshold Options for E3 12 Cards Parameter Description Port Display only...

Страница 731: ...e subtabs by clicking in the field you want to modify In some fields you can choose an option from a drop down list in others you can type a value or select or deselect a check box Step 5 Click Apply Step 6 Repeat Steps 3 through 5 for each subtab that has parameters you want to provision For definitions of the line settings see Table 20 18 For definitions of the line threshold settings see Table ...

Страница 732: ...ion point 0 225 Default 226 450 Admin State Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change For more information about administrative states refer to the Administrative and Service States appendix of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Unlocked Puts the port in service The port service state changes to Unlocked enabled Unlocked automaticInService Puts the port in auto...

Страница 733: ...port stays in the Unlocked disabled automaticInService state for the duration of the soak period After the soak period ends the port service state changes to Unlocked enabled Locked enabled disabled The port is out of service and unable to carry traffic Locked enabled maintenance The port is out of service for maintenance Alarm reporting is suppressed but traffic is carried and loopbacks are allow...

Страница 734: ...CPbit Near End and Far End AISSP Alarm indication signal seconds path Available for DS3 Pbit Near End only and for DS3 CPbit Near End and Far End 15 Min radio button Clicking this radio button and then clicking Refresh will cause the threshold values on this tab to display for 15 minute intervals 1 Day radio button Clicking this radio button and then clicking Refresh will cause the threshold value...

Страница 735: ...abs by clicking in the field you want to modify In some fields you can choose an option from a drop down list in others you can type a value or select or deselect a check box Step 5 Click Apply Step 6 Repeat Steps 3 through 5 for each subtab that has parameters you want to provision Step 7 For definitions of the line settings see Table 20 22 For definitions of the port settings see Table 20 23 on ...

Страница 736: ...vice Puts the port in automatic in service The port service state changes to Unlocked disabled automaticInService Locked disabled Removes the port from service and disables it The port service state changes to Locked enabled disabled Locked maintenance Removes the port from service for maintenance The port service state changes to Locked enabled maintenance PJVC4Mon Sets the VC4 that will be used ...

Страница 737: ...se the threshold values on this tab to display for 15 minute intervals 1 Day radio button Clicking this radio button and then clicking Refresh will cause the threshold values on this tab to display for 1 day intervals Table 20 25 VC4 Options for the STM1E 12 Card Parameter Description Options VC4 Display only VC4 container number 1 to 12 Enable IPPM Sets intermediate path performance monitoring IP...

Страница 738: ...you can choose an option from a drop down list in others you can type a value or select or deselect a check box Step 4 Click Apply Purpose This task changes threshold settings for STM N cards Tools Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP D60 Log into CTC page 17 49 Required As Needed As needed Onsite Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 20 26 STM N Threshold Optio...

Страница 739: ...TM 1 card therefore the PSD WPM parameter does not increment PSC S Protection Switching Count Span Available for Line Near End and Far End Note MS SPRing is not supported on the STM 1 card therefore the PSC S PM parameter does not increment PSD S Protection Switching Duration Span Available for Line Near End and Far End Note MS SPRing is not supported on the STM 1 card therefore the PSD S PM param...

Страница 740: ...ernet card where you want to view PM counts The card view appears Step 2 Click the Performance Ether Ports tabs Figure 20 11 Figure 20 11 Ether Ports on the Card View Performance Window Step 3 Click Refresh PM statistics for each port on the card appear Purpose This task enables you to view ML Series Ethernet port PM counts at selected time intervals to detect possible performance problems Tools E...

Страница 741: ... View ML Series POS Ports PM Parameters Note For ML Series card provisioning refer to the Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454 Cisco ONS 15454 SDH and Cisco ONS 15327 Step 1 In node view double click the ML Series Ethernet card where you want to view PM counts The card view appears Step 2 Click the Performance POS Ports tabs Figure 20 12 Purpose This task ...

Страница 742: ...the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Note To refresh reset or clear PM counts see the NTP D257 Change the PM Display procedure on page 8 2 Step 5 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D353 Provision G Series Flow Control Watermarks Step 1 In node view double click the G Series card graphic to open the card 124921 POS Ports tab Performance tab Card View Auto refresh Refresh button Baseli...

Страница 743: ... the cell in the row for the appropriate port e Enter a value in the cell The Flow Ctrl Hi value has a valid range from 2 to 511 and must be higher than the Flow Ctrl Lo value This value sets the flow control threshold for sending the signal to the attached Ethernet device to pause transmission f Click Apply Note Low watermarks are optimum for low latency subrate applications such as voice over IP...

Страница 744: ...anges to Locked enabled disabled Locked maintenance Removes the port from service for maintenance The port service state changes to Locked enabled maintenance Service State Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port Service states appear in the format Primary State Primary State Qualifier Secondary State Unlocked enabled The port is fully operational a...

Страница 745: ...king in the field you want to modify In some fields you can choose an option from a drop down list in others you can type a value or select or deselect a check box Link Recovery Enables or disables link recovery if a local port is inoperable If enabled a link reset occurs when there is a loss of transport from a cross connect switch protection switch or an upgrade Media Type Sets the proper payloa...

Страница 746: ...s from a remote node Credits are used for link flow control and for Extended Link Protocol ELP login frames between Fibre Channel fiber connectivity FICON Switch E ports Credits Available Sets the number of credits if an ELP login frame setting is missing or if the ELP login frame cannot be detected Credits Available is editable only if Auto Detect Credits is unchecked Note Longer distances betwee...

Страница 747: ...ters for FC_MR 4 ports Tools Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP D60 Log into CTC page 17 49 Required As Needed As needed Onsite Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Table 20 29 FC_MR 4 Card Distance Extension Port Settings Parameter Description Options Port Display only The card port number 1 through 4 Ingress Idle Filtering If checked prevents removal of excess Fi...

Страница 748: ...12s record the name of the circuit Figure 20 13 shows a circuit passing through a node doc 124 on the same VC4 VC4 2 Figure 20 13 Verifying Pass Through VC4s Step 4 Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for each circuit that appears in the Circuits tab Step 5 Delete and recreate each circuit recorded in Step 3 To delete the circuit see the DLP D27 Delete Circuits procedure on page 17 21 To create the circuit see Ch...

Страница 749: ...t An IP address of 0 0 0 0 means that any address can be used by the far end Step 5 Click OK Step 6 Return to your origination procedure NTP DLP D359 Change a Regenerator Section DCC Termination Step 1 Click the Provisioning Comm Channels RS DCC tabs Step 2 Click the RS DCC that you want to change Step 3 Click Edit Purpose This task modifies a multiplex section data communications channel MS DCC Y...

Страница 750: ...s that do not have other DCCs or network connections to the CTC computer Step 1 In node view click the Provisioning Comm Channels RS DCC tabs Step 2 Click the RS DCC termination and click Delete The Delete RS DCC Termination dialog box appears Step 3 Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box Step 4 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D361 Create a DCC Tunnel Purpose This task deletes an SD...

Страница 751: ... a tunnel Step 4 Click Next Step 5 In the Circuit Source area complete the following Node Choose the source node Slot Choose the source slot Port If displayed choose the source port Channel These options appear if you chose DCC Tunnel D1 D3 as the tunnel type Choose one of the following DCC1 D1 D3 This is the RS DCC DCC2 D4 D6 This is MS DCC 1 DCC3 D7 D9 This is MS DCC 2 DCC4 D10 D12 This is MS DC...

Страница 752: ...ear if not repeat the task Step 4 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D363 Provision Regenerator Section DCC Terminations Purpose This task deletes an SDH MS DCC termination on the ONS 15454 SDH Tools Equipment None Prerequisite Procedures DLP D60 Log into CTC page 17 49 Required As Needed As needed Onsite Remote Onsite or remote Security Level Provisioning or higher Purpose This task cre...

Страница 753: ...DCC tunnels See the DLP D361 Create a DCC Tunnel task on page 20 66 Step 4 In the Port Admin State area click the Set to unlocked radio button Step 5 Verify that the Disable OSPF on DCC Link check box is unchecked Step 6 If the RS DCC termination is to include a non ONS node check the Far End is Foreign check box This automatically sets the far end node IP address to 0 0 0 0 which means that any a...

Страница 754: ...ansfer Service Does not exchange data until a logical connection between two LAP D users is established This service provides reliable data transfer flow control and error control mechanisms UITS Unacknowledged Information Transfer Service Transfers frames containing user data with no acknowledgement The service does not guarantee that the data presented by one user will be delivered to another us...

Страница 755: ...S node check the Far End is Foreign check box This automatically sets the far end node IP address to 0 0 0 0 which means that any address can be specified by the far end To change the default to a specific the IP address see the DLP D359 Change a Regenerator Section DCC Termination task on page 20 65 Step 7 In the Layer 3 box perform one of the following Check the IP box only if the MS DCC is betw...

Страница 756: ...s on the LAN subnet The IS IS protocol uses the cost to calculate the shortest routing path The default metric cost for LAN subnets is 20 It normally should not be changed Step 9 Click Finish Note Multiplex Section DCC Termination Failure MS EOC and LOS alarms appear until you create all network DCC terminations and put the DCC termination STM N ports in service Step 10 Return to your originating ...

Страница 757: ...null characters d Click Apply then click Close Step 7 Provision the circuit destination transmit string a On the detailed circuit map right click the circuit destination port and choose Edit Path Trace from the shortcut menu b In the New Transmit String field enter the string that you want the circuit destination to transmit Enter a string that makes the destination port easy to identify such as t...

Страница 758: ...e other end as the current expected string An alarm is raised when a string that differs from the baseline is received Manual Uses the Current Expected String field as the baseline string An alarm is raised when a string that differs from the Current Expected String is received c If you set the Path Trace Mode field to Manual enter the string that the circuit source should receive from the circuit...

Страница 759: ...anual This operation commands the node to switch to the reference you have selected if the SSM quality of the reference is not lower than the current timing reference Force This operation commands the node to switch to the reference you have selected regardless of the SSM quality if the reference is valid For information about the Clear option see the DLP D369 Clear a Manual or Force Switched Node...

Страница 760: ...uits for an entire network from the View menu choose Go to Network View To view circuits that originate terminate or pass through a specific node from the View menu choose Go to Other Node then choose the node you want to search and click OK To view circuits that originate terminate or pass through a specific card in node view double click the card containing the circuits you want to view Step 2 C...

Страница 761: ...1 1 The circuit is protected by a 1 1 protection group 2F MS SPRing The circuit is protected by a two fiber MS SPRing 4F MS SPRing The circuit is protected by a four fiber MS SPRing 2F PCA The circuit is routed on a protection channel access PCA path on a two fiber MS SPRing PCA circuits are unprotected 4F PCA The circuit is routed on a PCA path on a four fiber MS SPRing PCA circuits are unprotect...

Страница 762: ...h Network spans are in one of two states up or down On CTC circuit and network maps up spans are shown as green lines and down spans are shown as gray lines If a failure occurs on a network span during a CTC session the span remains on the network map but its color changes to gray to indicate the span is down If you restart your CTC session while the failure is active the new CTC session cannot di...

Страница 763: ...f internode links that compose the circuit Right clicking the column shows a shortcut menu from which you can choose Span Details to show or hide circuit span detail State The circuit service state which is an aggregate of its cross connects The service states are Unlocked Locked or Locked partial For more information about circuit service states refer to the Administrative and Service States appe...

Страница 764: ...n the MS SPRing node ID of the source appears East Dest If traffic is sent on the node s east span the MS SPRing node ID of the destination appears Note MS SPRing squelching is performed on VC4s that carry high order circuits only VC4s carrying low order or stitched Ethernet circuits do not have entries in the squelch table Step 3 Return to your originating procedure NTP Purpose This task allows y...

Страница 765: ...tension Byte Mapping Step 1 In network view double click a MS SPRing node with OC48 LR STM16 LH AS trunk cards that will be reconnected after a MS SPRing node removal Step 2 Double click one OC48 LS STM16 LH AS MS SPRing trunk card Step 3 Click the Provisioning Line tab Purpose This task imports a Cisco MetroPlanner configuration file into the node to configure the node automatically Tools Equipme...

Страница 766: ... K3 Byte task on page 17 83 Step 8 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D393 Switch Between TDM and DWDM Network Views Step 1 From the View menu choose Go to Network View Step 2 From the Network Scope drop down list choose one of the following All Displays both TDM and DWDM nodes TDM Displays only ONS 15454 SDH nodes with SDH cards including the transponder TXP and muxponder MXP cards DWDM...

Страница 767: ...inds a modified Java policy file java policy on your PC In Software R4 0 and earlier the Java policy file was modified to allow CTC software files to be downloaded to your PC The modified Java policy file is not needed in ONS 15454 SDH nodes running Software R4 1 and later Choose one of the following options Yes Removes the modified Java policy file from your PC Choose this option only if you will...

Страница 768: ...C setup wizard to reinstall the Java policy file Step 3 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D421 View STM N PM Parameters Step 1 In node view double click the STM N card where you want to view PM counts The card view appears Step 2 Click the Performance tab Figure 21 1 Purpose This task enables you to view performance monitoring PM counts on an STM N card and port to detect possible perfo...

Страница 769: ...n the Param column The PM parameter values appear in the Curr current and Prev n previous columns For PM parameter definitions refer to the Performance Monitoring chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Step 6 To monitor another port on a multiport card choose another line from the Line drop down list and click Refresh Step 7 Return to your originating procedure NTP 102020 Directions r...

Страница 770: ...mation Step 1 Decide whether you want to view the alarm message history at node network or card level Purpose This task changes the Java Runtime Environment JRE version which is useful if you would like to upgrade to a later JRE version from an earlier one without using the software CD This does not affect the browser default version After selecting the desired JRE version you must exit CTC The ne...

Страница 771: ...y from node view a From the View menu choose Go to Network View b Click the History tab Alarms and conditions events raised during the current session appear Step 4 To view card alarm history from node view a From the View menu choose Go to Previous View b Double click a card on the shelf graphic to open the card level view Note TCC2 TCC2P cards and cross connect cards do not have a card view c Cl...

Страница 772: ...rofile based upon the default profile in use click New Then go to Step 8 Step 3 If you want to create a profile using an existing profile located on the node a Click Load and From Node in the Load Profile s dialog box b Click the node name you are logged into in the Node Names list c Click the name of an existing profile in the Profile Names list such as Default Then go to Step 5 Step 4 If you wan...

Страница 773: ...ame a profile that has the same name as another profile CTC adds a suffix to create a new name Long file names are supported Step 9 Click OK A new alarm profile named in Step 8 is created This profile duplicates the default profile severities and appears at the right of the previous profile column in the Alarm Profiles window You can select it and drag it to a different position Note Up to ten pro...

Страница 774: ...moted to MN in NSA situations Default severities are used for all alarms and conditions until you create and apply a new profile Changing a severity to inherited I or unset U does not change the severity of the alarm Step 11 After you have customized the new alarm profile right click the profile column to highlight it Step 12 Click Store Step 13 If you want to save the profile to a node a In the S...

Страница 775: ...odes task on page 18 18 Step 2 Depending on which card you want to apply the profile to click the following tabs If the card is an FC_MR 4 E Series Ethernet G Series Ethernet STM N or electrical DS3i N 12 E 1 E1 42 or E 3 card click the Provisioning Alarm Profiles Alarm Profile Editor tabs If the card is an ML Series Ethernet traffic card click the Provisioning Ether Alarming Alarm Profile Editor ...

Страница 776: ... new profile from the drop down list c Click Apply Step 4 To apply profiles to all ports on a card a In card view click the Force all ports to profile drop down arrow at the bottom of the window b Choose the new profile from the drop down list c Click Force still need to Apply d Click Apply In node view the Port Level Profiles column indicates port level profiles with a notation such as exist 1 Fi...

Страница 777: ...OS Alarming Alarm Profile Editor tabs depending on whether you want to apply the profile to the front physical ports Ether alarming or packet over SDH POS alarming For more information about ML Series card ports and service see the Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration Guide for the Cisco ONS 15454 Cisco ONS 15454 SDH and Cisco ONS 15327 Step 2 Click the profile you are deleting to sele...

Страница 778: ...Step 8 To remove the alarm profile from the window right click the column of the profile you deleted and choose Remove from the shortcut menu Note If a node and profile combination is selected but does not exist a warning appears One or more of the profile s selected do not exist on one or more of the node s selected For example this warning appears if Node A has only Profile 1 stored and the user...

Страница 779: ...ugh the filter To change the alarm severities shown in the filter go to Step 3 To change the time period filter for the alarms go to Step 4 Step 3 In the Show Severity area click the check boxes for the severities CR MJ MN or Not Alarmed NA that you want to be reported at the network level Leave severity check boxes deselected unchecked to prevent those severities from appearing When alarm filteri...

Страница 780: ...conditions individually from the Hide list to the Show list click the button To move conditions collectively from the Show list to the Hide list click the button To move conditions collectively from the Hide list to the Show list click the button Note Conditions include alarms Step 6 Click Apply and OK Alarm and condition filtering parameters are enforced when alarm filtering is enabled see the DL...

Страница 781: ...er source or system alarms is to suppress alarms for the entire node These cannot be suppressed separately Step 3 To suppress alarms for individual cards a Locate the card row using the Location column for the slot number or the Eqpt Type column for the equipment name b Check the Suppress Alarms column check box on that row Figure 18 5 on page 18 17 Alarms that directly apply to this card change a...

Страница 782: ...3 card the alarm object will be FAC 16 1 Step 8 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D431 Discontinue Alarm Suppression Caution If multiple CTC sessions are open discontinuing suppression in one session will discontinue suppression in all other open sessions Step 1 To discontinue alarm suppression for the entire node a In node view click the Provisioning Alarm Profiles Alarm Behavior tabs ...

Страница 783: ...ress Alarms check box for the port s you no longer want to suppress Step 5 Click Apply Suppressed alarms will reappear in the Alarms window They might have previously been cleared from the window using the Synchronize button The AS CMD alarm with the port object for example FAC 16 1 will be cleared in all views Step 6 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D432 View Port Status on the LCD St...

Страница 784: ...ve recommended with at least 50 MB of space available Operating system Windows 98 1st and 2nd editions Windows NT 4 0 with Service Pack 6a Windows 2000 with Service Pack 3 or Windows XP Home Purpose This task installs the CTC online user manuals Acrobat Reader 6 0 1 Java Runtime Environment JRE 1 4 2 and the CTC Java Archive JAR files JRE 1 4 2 is required to run Software Release 7 0 Preinstalling...

Страница 785: ...and the online user manuals Click Custom if you want to install either the JRE or the online user manuals Step 5 Click Next Step 6 Complete the following as applicable If you selected Typical in Step 4 skip this step and proceed to Step 7 If you selected Custom select the CTC component that you want to install and click Next If you selected Online User Manuals continue with Step 7 If you did not s...

Страница 786: ...o select the components to install and select the browsers that will use the JRE version d Click Next e If you selected Typical continue with Step i If you selected Custom click the drop down list for each program feature that you want to install and choose the desired setting The program features include Java 2 Runtime Environment Default Installs JRE 1 4 2 with support for European languages Sup...

Страница 787: ...6 x Step 1 Verify that your computer has the following RAM 384 MB recommended 512 MB optimum Hard drive 20 GB hard drive recommended with at least 50 MB of space available Operating System Solaris 8 or 9 Note These requirements are guidelines CTC performance is faster if your computer has a faster processor and more RAM Purpose This task installs the CTC online user manuals Acrobat Reader 6 0 1 JR...

Страница 788: ...p 10 Step 8 The directory where the installation wizard will install CTC online user manuals appears The default is usr doc ctc If you want to change the CTC online user manuals directory type the new directory path in the Directory Name field or click Browse to navigate to the directory If you do not want to change the CTC online user manuals directory skip this step Step 9 Click Next Step 10 Rev...

Страница 789: ...u selected Custom click the drop down list for each program feature that you want to install and choose the desired setting The program features include Java 2 Runtime Environment Default Installs JRE 1 4 2 with support for European languages Support for Additional Languages Adds support for non European languages Additional Font and Media Support Adds Lucida fonts Java Sound and color management ...

Страница 790: ...In the Defaults Selector area choose CTC and then Network Step 5 Click the Default Value field and choose a default map from the drop down list Map choices are Germany Japan Netherlands South Korea United Kingdom and the United States default Step 6 Click Apply The new network map appears Step 7 Click OK Step 8 If the ONS 15454 SDH icons are not visible right click the network view and choose Zoom...

Страница 791: ...one of the following options to set the access paths to the node No LAN Access Allows access to the node only through data communications channel DCC connections Access through the TCC2 TCC2P RJ 45 port and backplane is not permitted Front only Allows access through the TCC2 TCC2P RJ 45 port Access through the DCC and the backplane is not permitted Purpose This task deletes remote monitoring RMON ...

Страница 792: ...ox and click Apply You must type the password in the confirmation dialog box and click OK to disable it Step 4 In the TL1 Access area select the desired level of TL1 access Disabled completely disables all TL1 access Non Secure Secure allows access using SSH Step 5 In the PM Clearing Privilege field choose the minimum security level that can clear node PM data PROVISIONING or SUPERUSER Step 6 Sele...

Страница 793: ...mber 1 through 4 Port Name Provides the ability to assign the specified port a name User defined Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric special characters Blank by default See the DLP D314 Assign a Name to a Port task on page 20 7 State Places port in service out of service or out of service maintenance IS OOS OOS_MT Port Rate Selects the Fibre Channel interface 1 Gbps 2 Gbps Link Rate Displays the act...

Страница 794: ...4 Click Create The Create Ether Threshold dialog box appears Figure 21 9 Figure 21 9 Creating Ethernet RMON Thresholds Step 5 From the Slot drop down list choose the appropriate Ethernet card Step 6 From the Port drop down list choose the applicable port on the Ethernet card that you selected Step 7 From the Variable drop down list choose the variable See Table 21 2 on page 21 29 for a list of the...

Страница 795: ...r level protocols requested be transmitted and that were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer including those that were discarded or not sent ifOutDiscards G Series only The number of outbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected that would prevent their being transmitted dot3statsAlignmentErrors Number of frames with an alignment error that...

Страница 796: ...must detect a collision in the receive mode if three or more stations are transmitting simultaneously A repeater port must detect a collision when two or more stations are transmitting simultaneously Thus a probe placed on a repeater port could record more collisions than a probe connected to a station on the same segment Probe location plays a much smaller role when considering 10BaseT Section 14...

Страница 797: ...observed on any coax segments to which the repeater is connected etherStatsDropEvents The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources This number is not necessarily the number of packets dropped it is just the number of times this condition has been detected etherStatsJabbers Total number of octets of data including bad packets received on the network...

Страница 798: ...seconds occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15 second period an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded otherwise a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple...

Страница 799: ...TP DLP D457 Refresh E Series and G Series Ethernet PM Counts Step 1 In node view double click the card where you want to view PM counts The card view appears Step 2 Click the Performance History tabs Step 3 From the Interval drop down list choose one of the following 1 min 15 min Purpose This task preprovisions a card slot in CTC before you physically install the card in the ONS 15454 SDH Tools Eq...

Страница 800: ...ard resetting a card or changing port states When the problem is corrected the subsequent 1 day interval appears with a white background Step 7 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D458 Monitor PM Counts for a Selected Signal Step 1 In node view double click the card where you want to view PM counts The card view appears Step 2 Click the Performance tab Different port and signal type drop ...

Страница 801: ...definitions refer to the Performance Monitoring chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Step 5 View the PM parameter names that appear in the Param column The PM parameter values appear in the Curr current and Prev n previous columns For PM parameter definitions refer to the Performance Monitoring chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Step 6 Return to your originating pro...

Страница 802: ...unts associated with the current combination of statistics on the selected port This means that the selected time interval direction and signal type counts are erased from the card and the window All statistics for port x Clearing all statistics for port x erases from the card and the window all PM counts associated with all combinations of the statistics on the selected port This means that all t...

Страница 803: ... the PM parameter names that appear in the Param column The current PM parameter values appear in the port number columns For PM parameter definitions refer to the Performance Monitoring chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Step 5 Return to your originating procedure NTP Purpose This task enables you to view current statistical PM counts on an FC_MR 4 card and port to detect possibl...

Страница 804: ...number column to find the port you want to monitor Step 5 The transmit Tx and receive Rx bandwidth utilization values for the previous time intervals appear in the Prev n columns For PM parameter definitions refer to the Performance Monitoring chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Step 6 Return to your originating procedure NTP Purpose This task enables you to view line utilization P...

Страница 805: ... the PM parameter names that appear in the Param column The PM parameter values appear in the Prev n columns For PM parameter definitions refer to the Performance Monitoring chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Step 5 Return to your originating procedure NTP Purpose This task enables you to view historical PM counts at selected time intervals on an FC_MR 4 card and port to detect po...

Страница 806: ...rn to your originating procedure NTP DLP D465 Create FC_MR 4 RMON Alarm Thresholds Step 1 In node view double click the FC_MR 4 card where you want to create the RMON alarm thresholds Step 2 In card view click the Provisioning RMON Thresholds tabs Step 3 Click Create The Create Threshold dialog box appears Step 4 From the Slot drop down list choose the appropriate FC_MR 4 card Step 5 From the Port...

Страница 807: ...are not recognized as part of the defined Fibre Channel control words fibreStatsEncodingDispErrors Received control words that cannot be decoded due to invalid disparity fibreStatsRxFramesTooLong Received oversize Fibre Channel frames 2148 including cyclic redundancy check CRC fibreStatsRxFramesBadCRC Received Fibre Channel frames with bad CRC fibreStatsRxFrames Received total Fibre Channel frames...

Страница 808: ...tBuffers The number of GFP buffers that the GFP transmitter is allowed to transmit Remote GFP receiver tells the GFP transmitter how many buffers it has available fcStatsLinkRecoveries The number of times a link reset was initiated due to a GFP out of frame condition This is only valid when link recovery is enabled and is not valid when distance extension is enabled fcStatsRxCredits The maximum nu...

Страница 809: ... occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15 second period an event again fibreStatsRxFramesTooLong Received oversize Fibre Channel frames that are greater than 2148 including CRC fibreStatsRxFramesBadCRC Received Fibre Channel frames with bad CRC fibreStatsRxFrames Received total Fibre C...

Страница 810: ...box appears Step 5 Click Yes to delete that threshold Step 6 Return to your originating procedure NTP DLP D468 Create a Two Fiber MS SPRing Using the MS SPRing Wizard Step 1 From the View menu choose Go to Network View Step 2 Click the Provisioning MS SPRing tabs Step 3 Click Create MS SPRing Step 4 In the MS SPRing Creation dialog box set the MS SPRing properties Ring Type Choose two fiber Purpos...

Страница 811: ...dow click Excluded Nodes Review the information explaining why the MS SPRing could not be created then click OK c Depending on the problem click Back to start over or click Cancel to cancel the operation d Complete the NTP D40 Provision MS SPRing Nodes procedure on page 5 10 making sure all steps are completed accurately then start this procedure again Step 6 In the network graphic double click an...

Страница 812: ...y assigned to another MS SPRing Node ID Choose a Node ID from the drop down list 0 through 31 The Node ID identifies the node to the MS SPRing Nodes in the same MS SPRing must have unique Node IDs Reversion time Set the amount of time that will pass before the traffic reverts to the original working path The default is 5 minutes All nodes in an MS SPRing must have the same reversion time setting W...

Страница 813: ...TP DLP D470 Manually Route an SNCP Circuit for a Topology Upgrade Step 1 In the Circuit Routing Preferences area of the Unprotected to UPSR page uncheck Route Automatically Step 2 Click Next In the Route Review and Edit area node icons appear for you to route the circuit The circuit source node is selected Green arrows pointing from the source node to other network nodes indicate spans that are av...

Страница 814: ...rse but CTC does not check for node diversity Step 4 If you selected Review Route Before Creation in Step 2 complete the following substeps If not continue with Step 5 a Click Next b Review the circuit route To add or delete a circuit span choose a node on the circuit route Blue arrows show the circuit route Green arrows indicate spans that you can add Click a span arrowhead then click Include to ...

Страница 815: ...k time in hours and minutes hh mm format Use this column when you have checked PSAS to suppress alarms Once the port detects a signal the countdown begins for the designated soak time Soak time hours can be set from 0 to 48 Soak time minutes can be set from 0 to 45 in 15 minute increments Link State Displays the status between signaling points at port and attached device Allowed values are UP or D...

Страница 816: ...set in the Soak Time column Uncheck the PSAS checkbox to disbale alarm suppression Soak Time Enter a desired soak time in hours and minutes hh mm format Use this column when you have checked PSAS to suppress alarms Once the port detects a signal the countdown begins for the designated soak time Soak time hours can be set from 0 to 48 Soak time minutes can be set from 0 to 45 in 15 minute increment...

Страница 817: ...21 51 Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide R7 0 78 17194 01 Chapter 21 DLPs D400 to D499 DLP D494 Provision the POS Port of the ML Series Card Step 6 Return to your originating procedure NTP ...

Страница 818: ...21 52 Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide R7 0 78 17194 01 Chapter 21 DLPs D400 to D499 DLP D494 Provision the POS Port of the ML Series Card ...

Страница 819: ...on Display Node Card and Network Views CTC provides four views of the ONS 15454 SDH and the ONS network Node view appears when you first log into an ONS 15454 SDH This view shows a graphic of the ONS 15454 SDH shelf and provides access to tabs and subtabs that you use to manage the node Card view provides access to individual ONS 15454 SDH cards This view provides a graphic of the card and access ...

Страница 820: ...lected Object View from the View menu From the CTC View menu choose Go To Other Node then choose a node from the shortcut menu Use the arrows on the CTC toolbar to navigate up or down among views For example in network view click a node and then click the down arrow Network view In node view click the up arrow or the Network View tool on the CTC toolbar From the View menu choose Go To Network View...

Страница 821: ...d TDM node increases the span length between two ONS 15454 SDH nodes that contain TDM cards and optical amplifiers Amplified TDM nodes contain either OPT BST amplifiers or AD 1C cards Hub A DWDM hub node icon is represented as a three dimensional cylinder with amplifiers A hub node contains at least two 32 channel demultiplexers and two 32 channel multiplexers No OADM cards are provisioned For DWD...

Страница 822: ...inal east nodes are represented as a three dimensional square with one amplifier on the east side of the icon A terminal node contains one32DMX O or 32DMX card and one 32MUX O card No OADM cards are provisioned A flexible terminal node contains a series of OADM and amplifier cards For DWDM node information refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual Line Amplifier OSC regeneration Line ampl...

Страница 823: ...e Preferences dialog box which shows the following tabs General Allows you to change event defaults and manage preferences Login Node Groups Allows you to create login node groups See the DLP D61 Create Login Node Groups task on page 17 51 Map Allows you to customize the network view See the DLP D145 Change the Network View Background Color task on page 18 36 and the DLP D268 Apply a Custom Networ...

Страница 824: ...nd opens network view Not available in network view Go To Selected Object View Displays the object selected in the CTC window Go To Home View Displays the login node in node view Go To Network View Displays the network view Go To Other Node Displays a dialog box allowing you to enter the node name or IP address of a network node that you want to view Show Status Bar Click this item to show or hide...

Страница 825: ...ir an IP Tunnel task on page 17 25 Topology Upgrade Displays the following options Convert SNCP to MS SPRing Converts SNCP to MS SPRing See the NTP D210 Convert an SNCP to a Two Fiber MS SPRing Manually section on page 13 14 Convert Unprotected to SNCP Converts a point to point or linear add drop multiplexer ADM to SNCP See NTP D156 Convert a Point to Point or Linear ADM to an SNCP Manually sectio...

Страница 826: ...xpand or consolidate network view links based on link type Opens the CTC Alerts dialog box which shows the status of certain CTC background tasks When the CTC Alerts toolbar icon contains a red triangle unread notifications exist When there are no unread notifications the CTC Alerts toolbar icon contains a gray triangle Notifications include Network disconnection Send PDIP inconsistency CTC discov...

Страница 827: ...d delete the domain Node in network view Displays a menu that you can use to open the node reset the node icon position to the longitude and latitude set on the Provisioning General tab delete the node fix the node position for auto layout provision circuits and update circuits with a new node Span in network view Displays a menu that you can use to view information about the span s source and des...

Страница 828: ...on the card type Over card port in node view Displays card name port service state and alarm profile status Over card port in card view Displays port service state protection status if applicable and alarm profile status For DWDM cards the port number is labeled as channel band or line depending on the card type along with the port service state and alarm profile status Table A 4 CTC Window Mouse ...

Страница 829: ...s on the Provisioning General tab in node view Provision a circuit Right click a node From the shortcut menu choose Provision Circuit To and choose the node where you want to provision the circuit For circuit creation procedures see Chapter 6 Create Circuits and Low Order Tunnels Update circuits with new node Right click a node and choose Update Circuits With New Node from the shortcut menu Use th...

Страница 830: ...Enhanced State Model appendix of the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Reference Manual Unlocked Places the card in the Unlocked enabled service state Locked maintenance Places the card in the Locked enabled maintenance service state Table A 7 Table Display Options Task Click Right Click Shortcut Menu Resize column Click while dragging the column header separator to the right or left Rearrange column order Clic...

Страница 831: ...ocked disabled mismatchOfEquipment and unassigned Locked disabled maintenance and softwareDownload Locked disabled maintenance and notInstalled Locked disabled unassigned Locked disabled unassigned and notInstalled Locked enabled maintenance HW Part Displays the hardware part number this number is printed on the top of the card or equipment piece HW Rev Displays the hardware revision number Serial...

Страница 832: ...A 14 Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide R7 0 78 17194 01 Appendix A CTC Information and Shortcuts Equipment Inventory ...

Страница 833: ...ber MS SPRing 5 16 linear ADM network 5 8 open ended SNCP 5 36 point to point network turn up 5 4 SNCP 5 24 two fiber MS SPRing 5 14 active logins terminating 18 7 viewing 18 7 add drop multiplexer See linear ADM adding member to a VCAT circuit 17 67 MS SPRing node 14 2 node to a circuit A 11 node to a domain 18 42 node to a linear ADM 14 14 14 15 node to current session or login group 17 53 node ...

Страница 834: ...g 9 2 17 74 viewing alarm counts on LCD 9 5 viewing by time zone 18 15 viewing circuits affected by 9 4 viewing history 21 4 wiring 1 15 alarm severity working with filters 9 7 working with profiles 9 6 alerts saving 17 22 ALS changing maintenance settings 19 14 changing maintenance settings in STM N cards 19 14 setting mode 18 11 applying alarm profiles to cards 18 18 alarm profiles to nodes 18 1...

Страница 835: ...nging settings 10 1 to 10 7 CLEI code A 13 deleting 2 20 18 79 line terminating equipment 18 19 part number A 13 put ports in out of service 19 10 removing and replacing 2 20 resetting 15 16 17 30 revision number A 13 serial number A 13 slot compatibility 2 3 upgrading 12 1 to 12 14 verifying installation 4 2 CARLOSS alarm 6 88 CE 1000 4 cards provisioning Ethernet ports 19 8 provisioning ports 18...

Страница 836: ... point See low order aggregation point manual routing description 6 3 menu options A 7 merging 7 11 modifying and deleting 7 4 monitor 7 5 multiple drops 6 15 6 27 6 38 pass through verifying 20 64 protection types 20 77 provisioning low order VC3 20 9 provisioning SNCP 19 17 provisioning with a shortcut A 11 reconfiguring 7 10 repairing 17 25 rerouting traffic without interrupting service See cir...

Страница 837: ...2 1 N protection group 17 63 alarm severity profiles 9 6 21 6 circuit for an E Series port mapped card 6 75 DCC tunnel 20 66 domain icons 18 40 E Series EtherSwitch circuit 6 72 E Series hub and spoke Ethernet configuration 6 80 E Series multicard EtherSwitch manual cross connect 6 85 E Series shared packet ring Ethernet circuit 6 77 E Series single card EtherSwitch manual cross connect 6 82 four ...

Страница 838: ...lbar buttons UNIX workstation requirements 21 21 upgrading during network discovery 3 7 using online help A 7 using the mouse with A 8 views See views customizing the CTC network view 11 4 D database backing up 15 5 clearing the database 15 9 parameters that are not restored 15 10 restoring 15 6 18 81 restoring node and card defaults 15 9 data communications channel See DCC date changing settings ...

Страница 839: ...iagnostics file off loading 15 13 dialog box do not display 19 74 disabling alarm filtering 9 7 19 25 alarm supression 9 7 dialog box display 19 74 IPPM 18 19 node security mode 17 80 OSPF 18 36 proxy service 17 47 17 48 displaying See viewing DLP definition xviii DNS configuration 3 5 documentation audience xv conventions xviii objectives xiv organization xv to xviii related xviii domains adding ...

Страница 840: ...mance 8 3 protection 17 62 resetting 15 16 17 30 upgrading from 1 1 to 1 N protection 10 4 verifying installation 4 2 electrical protection switch initiating 17 35 enabling alarm filtering 9 7 19 24 alarm supression 9 7 DHCP 19 53 dialog box do not display option 19 74 IPPM 18 19 18 21 node security mode 17 77 OSI subnet on the LAN interface 18 60 pointer justification counts 18 19 end network ele...

Страница 841: ... 2 exercise ring 19 15 exporting CTC data 18 38 network element defaults 15 27 using the toolbar A 5 external alarms See AIC I card external controls See AIC I card external switching commands clearing 15 14 clearing an MS SPRing Force switch 18 82 clearing an MS SPRing Manual ring switch 19 44 clearing an MS SPRing span lockout 20 1 clearing an SNCP Force switch 18 85 exercising a four fiber MS S...

Страница 842: ... 19 65 disabling for alarms 19 25 link classes on the network map A 8 modifying parameters 21 12 finding alarms and conditions on the network 19 83 circuits 18 26 firewalls setting up access 4 8 firewall tunnels deleting 18 1 provisioning 17 83 flow control watermark provisioning 20 58 FMEC attaching electrical cables 1 16 installing cables 20 18 20 20 installing power and signal FMECs 1 7 install...

Страница 843: ...7 selecting 19 53 importing Cisco MetroPlanner configuration file 20 81 network element defaults 15 26 initiating electrical protection switch 17 35 external switching commands 15 14 MS SPRing Force ring switch 20 3 MS SPRing manual ring switch 20 2 MS SPRing span lockout 19 84 optical protection switch 17 34 SNCP Force switch 18 84 inspecting air filter 15 2 shelf assembly 1 4 17 2 shelf installa...

Страница 844: ...circuits 17 25 selecting IP address for login 17 51 setting through the LCD 17 53 setting up craft connection 17 37 IP encapsulated tunnel changing to RS DCC tunnel 17 24 creating 17 3 deleting 17 25 repairing IP address 17 25 IP over CLNS tunnel creating 18 62 deleting 18 70 editing 18 69 IPPM disabling 18 19 18 22 enabling 18 19 18 21 monitored IPPMs 18 21 reason to use 18 21 IP settings changin...

Страница 845: ...ut applying 19 2 clearing 19 3 20 1 logging in to CTC 17 49 to the GUI 3 7 logging out user on a single node 20 7 users on multiple nodes 20 8 login legal disclaimer changing 19 71 login node groups creating 17 51 deleting a node 14 9 deleting from a specified group 17 47 viewing 17 51 longitude setting up 4 5 loopback See also the Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Troubleshooting Guide 2 fiber MS SPRing 5 15 4...

Страница 846: ... 56 viewing POS port PM parameters 20 57 modifying See also changing 1 1 protection group 18 46 1 1 protection group 18 42 1 N protection group 18 44 AIC I card settings 10 3 alarm condition and history filtering parameters 21 12 alarm severity filters 9 7 card protection settings 11 5 card service state 10 5 circuits 7 4 circuit state 19 26 DCC terminations 11 5 FC_MR 4 card line settings 10 5 FC...

Страница 847: ... from an SNCP to a two fiber 13 14 creating 5 13 17 22 19 45 21 44 21 46 creating a half circuit 6 68 disabling the ring 18 83 DRI 5 18 5 21 exercise span See external switching commands Force switch See external switching commands four fiber acceptance test 5 16 installing fiber optic cables for 20 37 lockout See external switching commands Manual switch See external switching commands modifying ...

Страница 848: ...14 14 adding to a linear ADM using the wizard 14 15 adding to an SNCP 14 10 adding to current session 17 53 adding with the toolbar A 5 applying alarm profiles to 18 18 changing access privileges 21 25 changing management information 11 2 changing security policy 19 74 19 76 changing the node name 18 32 changing timing 11 6 15 18 clearing timing reference switch 20 76 configuring for RADIUS authen...

Страница 849: ...ode 18 66 editing router configuration 18 67 editing subnetwork point of attachment 18 68 enabling the subnet 18 60 LAN interface 18 60 modifying provisioning 11 3 primary area address 18 59 provisioning 4 14 18 53 18 59 18 60 Router Editor dialog box 18 59 tunneling across 18 62 viewing information 15 8 OSPF disabling 18 36 intervals 19 57 priority level 19 57 setting up or changing 19 56 overhea...

Страница 850: ...mance monitoring pointer justification counts enabling and disabling 18 19 reason to use 18 19 point to point acceptance test 5 4 provisioning 5 3 upgrading 13 2 13 4 13 6 13 8 13 10 13 11 ports applying alarm profiles to 21 9 assigning a name to 20 7 CE 100T 4 18 33 CE 100T 8 18 30 18 33 changing settings for the FC_MR 4 card 21 26 creating low order path tunnel for group of 6 47 default UDP port...

Страница 851: ...ADM 5 7 low order VC11 circuits 18 73 18 74 low order VC12 circuits 17 2 17 93 low order VC3 circuits 17 94 20 9 modifying for OSI 11 3 MS DCC terminations 20 71 MS SPRing SNCP DRI 5 30 5 32 MS SPRing half circuits 20 5 multirate PPM 18 27 open ended SNCP 5 34 optical line rate on multirate PPM 18 27 orderwire 17 76 OSI 4 14 18 53 18 59 18 60 point to point network 5 3 PPMs 10 6 proxy tunnels 17 7...

Страница 852: ... 15 6 node to factory configuration 15 9 the database 18 81 revertive switching electrical protection 17 63 17 64 optical protection 17 65 RIB ES IS 18 71 IS IS 18 70 rings See also MS SPRing See also SNCP See also subtending rings provisioning ring name 13 18 RIP 19 58 RMON creating Ethernet thresholds 8 5 21 28 creating FC_MR 4 thresholds 8 6 21 40 deleting Ethernet thresholds 8 5 21 25 deleting...

Страница 853: ...et ring 6 77 shelf acceptance test 1 18 changing contact information 18 32 connecting office power to 17 15 connecting the office ground 17 13 door 1 6 inspecting 1 4 17 2 17 26 mounting 17 4 17 6 17 7 turning up 4 1 to 4 14 unpacking 1 4 17 1 verifying 17 1 shell access 21 26 Simple Network Time Protocol See SNTP slots AIC I card 4 2 cross connect 4 2 preprovisioning 21 33 TCC2 and TCC2P 4 2 veri...

Страница 854: ...switch A 11 switching 17 89 17 92 upgrading 12 1 to 12 14 19 82 viewing circuits on 19 25 viewing properties A 11 Spanning Tree Protocol circuit blocking 6 74 viewing information 17 19 span upgrade wizard back out of an upgrade downgrade 12 10 initiating 12 7 recovery 12 10 splitter protection group 4 12 squelch table 20 80 SSM enabling for external or line timing 17 60 enabling for internal timin...

Страница 855: ...f Tables changing format A 11 displaying hidden columns A 12 printing data 18 37 reordering columns A 12 resizing columns A 12 sorting A 12 TARP adding a manual adjacency table entry 18 58 adding a static TIC to NSAP entry to the data cache 18 57 managing data cache 18 71 provisioning 4 14 provisioning or modifying operating parameters 18 55 removing a static TID to NSAP entry from the data cache ...

Страница 856: ... 59 20 61 20 63 21 26 modifying for FC_MR 4 cards 10 5 modifying for STM N cards 10 2 power monitor setting 4 6 TID Address Resolution Protocol See TARP time setting 4 5 time zone selecting 4 6 using to display alarms and conditions 18 15 timing BITS See BITS changing node timing reference 15 18 changing source 18 48 clear Manual or Forced reference switch 20 76 external 17 58 installing MIC C T P...

Страница 857: ... DS3i N 12 cards to 1 N protection 18 65 E1 N 14 cards to 1 N protection 18 63 from 1 1 to 1 N protection 10 4 network topology A 7 optical spans manually 12 10 span from network view A 11 STM N cards and spans automatically 12 7 TCC2 to TCC2P 12 5 unprotected span manually 19 82 XC VXL 10G to XC VXC 10G 12 4 XC VXL 2 5G to XC VXC 10G 12 2 XC VXL 2 5G to XC VXL 10G 12 2 uploading software using th...

Страница 858: ...R 4 card PM parameters 21 37 21 38 21 39 G Series Ethernet card maintenance information 15 16 inventory A 12 IS IS RIB 18 70 ML Series PM parameters 20 56 20 57 MS SPRing squelch table 20 80 near end PM counts 18 24 OSI information 15 8 port status on the LCD 21 17 spanning tree information 17 19 span properties A 11 STM N PM parameters 21 2 the status bar A 6 the toolbar A 6 timing report 15 18 v...

Страница 859: ...G cards installing 20 25 replacing 15 21 to 15 22 side switch test 19 60 slot compatibility 2 5 upgrading 12 4 upgrading to 12 2 verifying installation 4 2 view resource usage 7 2 XC VXL 2 5G cards installing 20 25 replacing 15 21 to 15 22 side switch test 19 60 slot compatibility 2 3 upgrading 12 2 verifying installation 4 2 view resource usage 7 2 XFPs See SFPs XFPs Y Y cable protection deleting...

Страница 860: ...Index IN 28 Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Procedure Guide R6 0 78 17194 01 ...

Отзывы:

Нет отзывов

Похожие инструкции для ONS 15454 SDH

dbx 902 Manual preview
902
Бренд: dbx Страницы: 8
Rain Bird E-3 Installation, Programming & Operation Manual preview
E-3
Бренд: Rain Bird Страницы: 17
Aleratec 310108 Quick Start Manual preview
310108
Бренд: Aleratec Страницы: 12
Dahua DHI-NVR2104-P-4KS2 Quick Start Manual preview
DHI-NVR2104-P-4KS2
Бренд: Dahua Страницы: 23
Multitech MultiConnect SE MTS2EA Quick Start Manual preview
MultiConnect SE MTS2EA
Бренд: Multitech Страницы: 8
Justec JDR454WV4 User Manual preview
JDR454WV4
Бренд: Justec Страницы: 61
JETWAY LI1B Series User Manual preview
LI1B Series
Бренд: JETWAY Страницы: 55
Tbus NV-ER1816i Installation Manual preview
NV-ER1816i
Бренд: Tbus Страницы: 25
Faderfox 4midiloop User Manual preview
4midiloop
Бренд: Faderfox Страницы: 10
Hanwha Techwin Wisenet PRN-6400B4 Quick Manual preview
Wisenet PRN-6400B4
Бренд: Hanwha Techwin Страницы: 14
ZALMAN FS-V7 User Manual preview
FS-V7
Бренд: ZALMAN Страницы: 9
Roland Super Sound Set SR-JV80-07 Owner'S Manual preview
Super Sound Set SR-JV80-07
Бренд: Roland Страницы: 8
Schrack Technik HSERG245GS Instruction Sheet preview
HSERG245GS
Бренд: Schrack Technik Страницы: 2
ICP DAS USA ZT-2024 Quick Start Manual preview
ZT-2024
Бренд: ICP DAS USA Страницы: 8
Hauppauge WinTV USB Installation And Reference Manual preview
WinTV USB
Бренд: Hauppauge Страницы: 55
AXIOMTEK CEM500 Quick Installation Manual preview
CEM500
Бренд: AXIOMTEK Страницы: 2
XAVI Technologies Corp. X7822r User Manual preview
X7822r
Бренд: XAVI Technologies Corp. Страницы: 63
hilscher netHOST NHST-T100 User Manua preview
netHOST NHST-T100
Бренд: hilscher Страницы: 75

Бренды по названию

Популярные бренды

Загрузить еще бренды